Merge 8.7

TIP 582: Comments in Expressions
Added badges to README
2020-11-08 17:31:38 +00:00 · 2020-11-08 17:21:09 +00:00 · 2020-11-08 13:38:20 +00:00 · 2020-11-08 13:34:03 +00:00 · 2020-11-08 12:08:01 +00:00 · 2020-11-07 14:29:06 +00:00
698 changed files with 74706 additions and 51770 deletions
@@ -1,9 +1,12 @@
-compat/zlib/win32/zdll.lib
-compat/zlib/win32/zlib1.dll
-compat/zlib/win64/zdll.lib
-compat/zlib/win64/zlib1.dll
-compat/zlib/win64/libz.dll.a
-compat/zlib/zlib.3.pdf
+*.a
 *.bmp
+*.dll
+*.exe
 *.gif
-*.png
+*.gz
+*.jpg
+*.lib
+*.pdf
+*.png
+*.xlsx
+*.zip
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ libtommath/pretty.build
 libtommath/tommath.src
 libtommath/*.log
 libtommath/*.pdf
-libtommath/gen.pl
+libtommath/*.pl
 libtommath/*.sh
 libtommath/doc/*
 libtommath/tombc/*
@@ -64,4 +64,5 @@ win/*.manifest
 win/pkgs/*
 win/coffbase.txt
 win/tcl.hpj
+win/nmakehlp.out
 win/nmhlp-out.txt
@@ -27,6 +27,7 @@

 # Denote all files that are truly binary and should not be modified.
 *.a binary
+*.bmp binary
 *.dll binary
 *.exe binary
 *.gif binary
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+Important Note
+==========
+Please do not file issues with Tcl on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tcl issues are hosted in the [tcl fossil repository on core.tcl.tk](https://core.tcl.tk/tcl/tktnew); please post them there.
@@ -0,0 +1,3 @@
+Important Note
+==========
+Please do not file pull requests with Tcl on Github. They are unlikely to be noticed in a timely fashion. Tcl issues (including patches) are hosted in the [tcl fossil repository on core.tcl.tk](https://core.tcl.tk/tcl/tktnew); please post them there.
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+name: Linux Build and Test
+on: [push]
+jobs:
+  build:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout
+        uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      - name: Configure
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          mkdir "${HOME}/install dir"
+          ./configure ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || (cat config.log && exit 1)
+      - name: Build
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make all
+      - name: Build Test Harness
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make tcltest
+      - name: Run Tests
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make test
+      - name: Test-Drive Installation
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make install
+      - name: Create Distribution Package
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make dist
+      - name: Convert Documentation to HTML
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make html-tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+name: Linux Build and Test
+on: [push]
+jobs:
+  build:
+    runs-on: ubuntu-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout
+        uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      - name: Configure
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          mkdir "${HOME}/install dir"
+          ./configure ${CFGOPT} "--prefix=$HOME/install dir" || (cat config.log && exit 1)
+      - name: Build
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make all
+      - name: Build Test Harness
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make tcltest
+      - name: Run Tests
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make test
+      - name: Test-Drive Installation
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make install
+      - name: Create Distribution Package
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make dist
+      - name: Convert Documentation to HTML
+        working-directory: unix
+        run: |
+          make html-tcl
@@ -0,0 +1,22 @@
+name: Windows Build and Test
+on: [push]
+jobs:
+  build:
+    runs-on: windows-latest
+    steps:
+      - name: Checkout
+        uses: actions/checkout@v2
+      - name: Init MSVC
+        uses: ilammy/msvc-dev-cmd@v1
+      - name: Build
+        working-directory: win
+        run: |
+          nmake -f makefile.vc all
+      - name: Build Test Harness
+        working-directory: win
+        run: |
+          nmake -f makefile.vc tcltest
+      - name: Run Tests
+        working-directory: win
+        run: |
+          nmake -f makefile.vc test
@@ -1,11 +1,26 @@
 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-8"?>
 <projectDescription>
-	<name>tcl8.6</name>
+	<name>tcl8</name>
 	<comment></comment>
 	<projects>
 	</projects>
 	<buildSpec>
+		<buildCommand>
+			<name>org.eclipse.cdt.managedbuilder.core.genmakebuilder</name>
+			<triggers>clean,full,incremental,</triggers>
+			<arguments>
+			</arguments>
+		</buildCommand>
+		<buildCommand>
+			<name>org.eclipse.cdt.managedbuilder.core.ScannerConfigBuilder</name>
+			<triggers>full,incremental,</triggers>
+			<arguments>
+			</arguments>
+		</buildCommand>
 	</buildSpec>
 	<natures>
+		<nature>org.eclipse.cdt.core.cnature</nature>
+		<nature>org.eclipse.cdt.managedbuilder.core.managedBuildNature</nature>
+		<nature>org.eclipse.cdt.managedbuilder.core.ScannerConfigNature</nature>
 	</natures>
 </projectDescription>
@@ -1,6 +1,8 @@
 language: c
 addons:
  apt:
+    sources:
+      - ubuntu-toolchain-r-test
    packages:
      - binutils-mingw-w64-i686
      - binutils-mingw-w64-x86-64
@@ -11,71 +13,65 @@ addons:
      - gcc-multilib
 jobs:
  include:
-# Testing on Linux with various compilers
+# Testing on Linux GCC
    - name: "Linux/GCC/Shared"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
    - name: "Linux/GCC/Shared: UTF_MAX=4"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
        - CFGOPT=CFLAGS=-DTCL_UTF_MAX=4
-    - name: "Linux/GCC/Shared: UTF_MAX=6"
+    - name: "Linux/GCC/Shared: NO_DEPRECATED"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
-        - CFGOPT=CFLAGS=-DTCL_UTF_MAX=6
+        - CFGOPT="CFLAGS=-DTCL_NO_DEPRECATED=1"
    - name: "Linux/GCC/Static"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - CFGOPT="--disable-shared"
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
    - name: "Linux/GCC/Debug"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
        - CFGOPT="--enable-symbols"
    - name: "Linux/GCC/Mem-Debug"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
        - CFGOPT="--enable-symbols=mem"
-# Older versions of GCC...
-    - name: "Linux/GCC 7/Shared"
+# C++ build.
+    - name: "Linux/G++/Shared"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
-      compiler: gcc-7
-      addons:
-        apt:
-          sources:
-            - ubuntu-toolchain-r-test
-          packages:
-            - g++-7
+      dist: focal
+      compiler: g++
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
-    - name: "Linux/GCC 6/Shared"
+        - CFGOPT="CC=g++ CFLAGS=-Dregister=dont+use+register"
+# Newer/Older versions of GCC
+    - name: "Linux/GCC 10/Shared"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
-      compiler: gcc-6
+      dist: focal
+      compiler: gcc-10
      addons:
        apt:
-          sources:
-            - ubuntu-toolchain-r-test
          packages:
-            - g++-6
+            - g++-10
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
    - name: "Linux/GCC 5/Shared"
@@ -84,44 +80,49 @@ jobs:
      compiler: gcc-5
      addons:
        apt:
-          sources:
-            - ubuntu-toolchain-r-test
          packages:
            - g++-5
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
-# Clang
+# Testing on Linux Clang
    - name: "Linux/Clang/Shared"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: clang
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
+    - name: "Linux/Clang/Shared:NO_DEPRECATED"
+      os: linux
+      dist: xenial
+      compiler: clang
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=unix
+        - CFGOPT="CFLAGS=-DTCL_NO_DEPRECATED=1"
    - name: "Linux/Clang/Static"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: clang
      env:
        - CFGOPT="--disable-shared"
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
    - name: "Linux/Clang/Debug"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: clang
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
        - CFGOPT="--enable-symbols"
    - name: "Linux/Clang/Mem-Debug"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: clang
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
        - CFGOPT="--enable-symbols=mem"
 # Testing on Mac, various styles
-    - name: "macOS/Xcode 11.5/Shared"
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 12/Shared"
      os: osx
-      osx_image: xcode11.5
+      osx_image: xcode12.2
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=macosx
      install: []
@@ -129,34 +130,62 @@ jobs:
        - make all
        # The styles=develop avoids some weird problems on OSX
        - make test styles=develop
-    - name: "macOS/Xcode 11.5/Shared/Unix-like"
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 12/Shared/Unix-like"
      os: osx
-      osx_image: xcode11.5
+      osx_image: xcode12.2
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
-# Older MacOS versions
-    - name: "macOS/Xcode 11/Shared"
+        - CFGOPT="--enable-dtrace"
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 12/Shared/libtommath"
      os: osx
-      osx_image: xcode11
+      osx_image: xcode12.2
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=macosx
      install: []
      script: *mactest
-    - name: "macOS/Xcode 10/Shared"
+      addons:
+        homebrew:
+          packages:
+            - libtommath
+    - name: "macOS/Clang++/Xcode 12/Shared"
+      os: osx
+      osx_image: xcode12.2
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=unix
+        - CFGOPT="CC=clang++ --enable-framework --enable-dtrace CFLAGS=-Dregister=dont+use+register CPPFLAGS=-D__private_extern__=extern"
+      script:
+        - make all tcltest
+# Newer MacOS versions
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 12/Universal Apps/Shared"
+      os: osx
+      osx_image: xcode12u
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=macosx
+      install: []
+      script: *mactest
+# Older MacOS versions
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 11/Shared"
+      os: osx
+      osx_image: xcode11.7
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=macosx
+      install: []
+      script: *mactest
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 10/Shared"
      os: osx
      osx_image: xcode10.3
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=macosx
      install: []
      script: *mactest
-    - name: "macOS/Xcode 9/Shared"
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 9/Shared"
      os: osx
-      osx_image: xcode9.2
+      osx_image: xcode9.4
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=macosx
      install: []
      script: *mactest
-    - name: "macOS/Xcode 8/Shared"
+    - name: "macOS/Clang/Xcode 8/Shared"
      os: osx
      osx_image: xcode8.3
      env:
@@ -167,7 +196,7 @@ jobs:
 # Doesn't run tests because wine is only an imperfect Windows emulation
    - name: "Linux-cross-Windows/GCC/Shared/no test"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: x86_64-w64-mingw32-gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=win
@@ -181,7 +210,7 @@ jobs:
 # Doesn't run tests because wine is only an imperfect Windows emulation
    - name: "Linux-cross-Windows-32/GCC/Shared/no test"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: i686-w64-mingw32-gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=win
@@ -195,6 +224,8 @@ jobs:
        - BUILD_DIR=win
        - VCDIR="/C/Program Files (x86)/Microsoft Visual Studio/2017/BuildTools/VC/Auxiliary/Build"
      before_install: &vcpreinst
+        - rm -rf tests/safe-stock8*.test
+        - touch generic/tclStubInit.c generic/tclOOStubInit.c generic/tclOOScript.h
        - PATH="$PATH:$VCDIR"
        - cd ${BUILD_DIR}
      install: []
@@ -210,6 +241,15 @@ jobs:
      script:
        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=utfmax' '-f' makefile.vc all tcltest
        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=utfmax' '-f' makefile.vc test
+    - name: "Windows/MSVC/Shared: NO_DEPRECATED"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: cl
+      env: *vcenv
+      before_install: *vcpreinst
+      install: []
+      script:
+        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=nodep' '-f' makefile.vc all tcltest
+        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=nodep' '-f' makefile.vc test
    - name: "Windows/MSVC/Static"
      os: windows
      compiler: cl
@@ -219,6 +259,15 @@ jobs:
      script:
        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=static,msvcrt' '-f' makefile.vc all tcltest
        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=static,msvcrt' '-f' makefile.vc test
+    - name: "Windows/MSVC/StaticPackage"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: cl
+      env: *vcenv
+      before_install: *vcpreinst
+      install: []
+      script:
+        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=static,staticpkg,msvcrt' '-f' makefile.vc all tcltest
+        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x64 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=static,staticpkg,msvcrt' '-f' makefile.vc test
    - name: "Windows/MSVC/Debug"
      os: windows
      compiler: cl
@@ -256,6 +305,15 @@ jobs:
      script:
        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x86 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=utfmax' '-f' makefile.vc all tcltest
        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x86 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=utfmax' '-f' makefile.vc test
+    - name: "Windows/MSVC-x86/Shared: NO_DEPRECATED"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: cl
+      env: *vcenv
+      before_install: *vcpreinst
+      install: []
+      script:
+        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x86 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=nodep' '-f' makefile.vc all tcltest
+        - cmd.exe //C vcvarsall.bat x86 '&&' nmake 'OPTS=nodep' '-f' makefile.vc test
    - name: "Windows/MSVC-x86/Static"
      os: windows
      compiler: cl
@@ -291,7 +349,9 @@ jobs:
        - BUILD_DIR=win
        - CFGOPT="--enable-64bit"
      before_install: &makepreinst
-        - choco install -y make
+        - rm -rf tests/safe-stock8*.test
+        - touch generic/tclStubInit.c generic/tclOOStubInit.c generic/tclOOScript.h
+        - choco install -y make zip
        - cd ${BUILD_DIR}
    - name: "Windows/GCC/Shared: UTF_MAX=4"
      os: windows
@@ -300,6 +360,22 @@ jobs:
        - BUILD_DIR=win
        - CFGOPT="--enable-64bit CFLAGS=-DTCL_UTF_MAX=4"
      before_install: *makepreinst
+    - name: "Windows/GCC/Shared: NO_DEPRECATED"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: gcc
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=win
+        - CFGOPT="--enable-64bit CFLAGS=-DTCL_NO_DEPRECATED=1"
+      before_install: *makepreinst
+    - name: "Windows/G++/Shared"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: g++
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=win
+        - CFGOPT="CC=g++ --enable-64bit"
+      before_install: *makepreinst
+      script:
+        - make all tcltest
    - name: "Windows/GCC/Static"
      os: windows
      compiler: gcc
@@ -335,6 +411,22 @@ jobs:
        - BUILD_DIR=win
        - CFGOPT="CFLAGS=-DTCL_UTF_MAX=4"
      before_install: *makepreinst
+    - name: "Windows/GCC-x86/Shared: NO_DEPRECATED"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: gcc
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=win
+        - CFGOPT="CFLAGS=-DTCL_NO_DEPRECATED=1"
+      before_install: *makepreinst
+    - name: "Windows/G++-x86/Shared"
+      os: windows
+      compiler: g++
+      env:
+        - BUILD_DIR=win
+        - CFGOPT="CC=g++"
+      before_install: *makepreinst
+      script:
+        - make all tcltest
    - name: "Windows/GCC-x86/Static"
      os: windows
      compiler: gcc
@@ -359,13 +451,15 @@ jobs:
 # "make dist" only
    - name: "Linux: make dist"
      os: linux
-      dist: bionic
+      dist: focal
      compiler: gcc
      env:
        - BUILD_DIR=unix
      script:
        - make dist
 before_install:
+  - rm -rf tests/safe-stock8*.test
+  - touch generic/tclStubInit.c generic/tclOOStubInit.c generic/tclOOScript.h
  - cd ${BUILD_DIR}
 install:
  - mkdir "$HOME/install dir"
@@ -373,6 +467,6 @@ install:
 before_script:
  - export ERROR_ON_FAILURES=1
 script:
-  - make all tcltest
+  - make all tcltest || echo "Something wrong, maybe a hickup, let's try again"
  - make test
  - make install
@@ -351,7 +351,7 @@

 	* mac/tclMacFile.c: fixed bug in permission checking code

-	* mac/tclMacLoad.c: corrected utf8 handling, comparison of package
+	* mac/tclMacLoad.c: corrected utf-8 handling, comparison of package
 	names to code fragment names changed to only match on the length of
 	package name, this allows for fragment names with version numbers
 	appended.
@@ -3525,7 +3525,7 @@
 	* generic/tclVar.c (Tcl_UnsetObjCmd): Rewrote argument parser to avoid
 	a read off the end of the argument array that could occur when
 	executing something like [unset -nocomplain] was executed. Improved
-	the error message given when too few arguments are given (-nocomplain
+	the error message given when not enough arguments are given (-nocomplain
 	should obviously be *before* --, not after it) and also modified the
 	test suite to take account of that and the documentation to use the
 	same improvement. [Bug 405769]
@@ -1753,7 +1753,7 @@

 2002-07-05  Reinhard Max  <max@suse.de>

-	* generic/tclClock.c (FormatClock): Convert the format string to UTF8
+	* generic/tclClock.c (FormatClock): Convert the format string to utf-8
 	before calling TclpStrftime, so that non-ASCII characters don't get
 	mangled when the result string is being converted back.
 	* tests/clock.test: Added a test for that.
@@ -2302,7 +2302,7 @@
 	934511].

 	* doc/CrtCommand.3: Added note that the arguments given to the command
-	proc of a Tcl_CreateCommand are in utf8 since Tcl 8.1. Closing [Patch
+	proc of a Tcl_CreateCommand are in utf-8 since Tcl 8.1. Closing [Patch
 	414778].

 	* doc/ChnlStack.3: Removed the declaration that the interp argument to
@@ -2873,7 +2873,7 @@
 2004-06-02  Jeff Hobbs	<jeffh@ActiveState.com>

 	* win/tclWinFile.c (TclpFindExecutable): when using GetModuleFileNameA
-	(Win9x), convert from CP_ACP to WCHAR then convert back to utf8.
+	(Win9x), convert from CP_ACP to WCHAR then convert back to utf-8.
 	Adjunct to 2004-04-07 fix.

 2004-06-02  David Gravereaux <davygrvy@pobox.com>
@@ -1426,7 +1426,7 @@
 	initialization assumptions of the TIP 280 code in CompileWord().

 	* generic/tclCompExpr.c:	Suppress the attempt to convert to
-	numeric when pre-compiling a constant expresion indicates an error.
+	numeric when pre-compiling a constant expression indicates an error.

 2007-08-22  Miguel Sofer  <msofer@users.sf.net>

@@ -1,11 +1,21 @@
 # README:  Tcl

-This is the **Tcl 8.6.10** source distribution.
+This is the **Tcl 8.7a4** source distribution.

 You can get any source release of Tcl from [our distribution
 site](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/).

-[![Build Status](https://travis-ci.org/tcltk/tcl.svg?branch=core-8-6-branch)](https://travis-ci.org/tcltk/tcl)
+8.6.10
+[![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/workflows/Linux%20Build%20and%20Test/badge.svg?branch=core-8-6-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Linux+Build+and+Test%22+branch%3Acore-8-6-branch)
+[![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/workflows/Windows%20Build%20and%20Test/badge.svg?branch=core-8-6-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Windows+Build+and+Test%22+branch%3Acore-8-6-branch)
+<br>
+8.7a4
+[![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/workflows/Linux%20Build%20and%20Test/badge.svg?branch=core-8-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Linux+Build+and+Test%22+branch%3Acore-8-branch)
+[![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/workflows/Windows%20Build%20and%20Test/badge.svg?branch=core-8-branch)](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Windows+Build+and+Test%22+branch%3Acore-8-branch)
+<br>
+9.0a2
+[![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/workflows/Linux%20Build%20and%20Test/badge.svg?branch=main)](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Linux+Build+and+Test%22+branch%3Amain)
+[![Build Status](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/workflows/Windows%20Build%20and%20Test/badge.svg?branch=main)](https://github.com/tcltk/tcl/actions?query=workflow%3A%22Windows+Build+and+Test%22+branch%3Amain)

 ## Contents
 1. [Introduction](#intro)
@@ -43,7 +53,7 @@ and selling it either in whole or in part.  See the file
 ## <a id="doc">2.</a> Documentation
 Extensive documentation is available at our website.
 The home page for this release, including new features, is
-[here](https://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/8.6.html).
+[here](https://www.tcl.tk/software/tcltk/8.7.html).
 Detailed release notes can be found at the
 [file distributions page](https://sourceforge.net/projects/tcl/files/Tcl/)
 by clicking on the relevant version.
@@ -53,8 +63,8 @@ Xchange](https://www.tcl-lang.org/about/).
 There have been many Tcl books on the market.  Many are mentioned in
 [the Wiki](https://wiki.tcl-lang.org/_/ref?N=25206).

-The complete set of reference manual entries for Tcl 8.6 is [online,
-here](https://www.tcl-lang.org/man/tcl8.6/).
+The complete set of reference manual entries for Tcl 8.7 is [online,
+here](https://www.tcl-lang.org/man/tcl8.7/).

 ### <a id="doc.unix">2a.</a> Unix Documentation
 The `doc` subdirectory in this release contains a complete set of
@@ -8796,6 +8796,55 @@ improvements to regexp engine from Postgres (lane,porter,fellows,seltenreich)

 --- Released 8.6.7, August 9, 2017 --- https://core.tcl-lang.org/tcl/ for details

+Changes to 8.7a1 include all changes to the 8.6 line through 8.6.7,
+plus the following, which focuses on the high-level feature changes
+in this changeset (new minor version) rather than bug fixes:
+
+2016-03-17 (bug)[0b8c38] socket accept callbacks always in global ns (porter)
+        *** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY ***
+
+2016-07-01 Hack accommodations for legacy Itcl 3 disabled (porter)
+
+2016-07-12 Make TCL_HASH_TYPE build-time configurable (nijtmans)
+
+2016-07-19 (bug)[0363f0] Partial array search ID reform (porter)
+
+2016-07-19 (feature removed) Tcl_ObjType "array search" unregistered (porter)
+	*** POTENTIAL INCOMPATIBILITY for Tcl_GetObjType("array search") ***
+
+2016-10-04 Server socket on port 0 chooses port supporting IPv4 * IPv6 (max)
+
+2016-11-25 [array names -regexp] supports backrefs (goth)
+
+2017-01-04 (TIP 456) New routine Tcl_OpenTcpServerEx() (limeboy)
+
+2017-01-04 (TIP 459) New subcommand [package files] (nijtmans)
+
+2017-01-16 threaded allocator initialization repair (vasiljevic,nijtmans)
+
+2017-01-30 Add to Win shell builtins: assoc ftype move (ashok)
+
+2017-03-31 TCL_MEM_DEBUG facilities better support 64-bit memory (nijtmans)
+
+2017-04-13 \u escaped content in msg files converted to true utf-8 (nijtmans)
+
+2017-05-18 (TIP 458) New epoll or kqueue notifiers are default (alborboz)
+
+2017-05-31 Purge build support for SunOS-4.* (stu)
+
+2017-06-22 (TIP 463) New option [regsub ... -command ...] (fellows)
+
+2017-06-22 (TIP 470) Tcl_GetDefineContextObject();[oo::define [self]] (fellows)
+=> TclOO 1.2.0
+
+2017-06-23 (TIP 472) Support 0d as prefix of decimal numbers (iyer,griffin)
+
+2017-08-31 (bug)[2a9465] http state 100 continue handling broken (oehlmann)
+
+2017-09-02 (bug)[0e4d88] replace command, delete trace kills namespace (porter)
+
+--- Released 8.7a1, September 8, 2017 --- http://core.tcl.tk/tcl/ for details
+
 2017-08-10 [array names -regexp] supports backrefs (goth)

 2017-08-10 Fix gcc build failures due to #pragma placement (cassoff,fellows)
@@ -8941,7 +8990,133 @@ improvements to regexp engine from Postgres (lane,porter,fellows,seltenreich)

 2019-11-15 (bug)[135804] segfault in [next] after destroy (coulter,sebres)

-2019-11-18 (bug)[13657a] application/json us text, not binary (noe,nijtmans)
-=> http 2.9.1
-
 - Released 8.6.10, Nov 21, 2019 - details at http://core.tcl-lang.org/tcl/ -
+
+Changes to 8.7a3 include all changes to the 8.6 line through 8.6.10,
+plus the following, which focuses on the high-level feature changes
+in this changeset (new minor version) rather than bug fixes:
+
+2017-11-01 (bug)[3c32a3] crash deleting class mixed into instance (coulter)
+
+2017-11-03 [TIP 345] eliminate the encoding 'identity' (porter)
+
+2017-11-04 (bug)[0d902e] [string first] on ASCII stored as Unicode (fellows)
+
+2017-11-17 [TIP 422] Mark all Tcl_*VA() routines deprecated. (nijtmans)
+
+2017-11-20 (support) Ended use of the obsolete values.h header (culler)
+
+2017-11-30 (bug)[8e1e31] [lsort] ordering of U+0000 (nijtmans)
+
+2017-12-07 [TIP 487] Terminate support for pre-XP Windows (nijtmans)
+
+2017-12-08 [TIP 477] Reform of nmake build (nadkarni)
+
+2017-12-20 (bug)[ba1419] Crash: complex ensemble delete, namespace-7.8 (coulter)
+
+2018-01-17 [TIP 485] Removal of many deprecated features (nijtmans)
+
+2018-01-27 (bug) Crash in [join $l $l], join-4.1 (porter)
+
+2018-02-06 [TIP 493] Cease Distribution of http 1.0 (porter)
+
+2018-02-06 [TIP 484] internal rep for native ints are all 64-bit (nijtmans)
+
+2018-02-14 [TIP 476] Scan/Printf consistency (nijtmans)
+
+2018-03-05 [TIP 351] [lsearch] striding
+
+2018-03-05 [TIPs 330,336] tighten access to Interp fields (porter)
+
+2018-03-12 [TIP 462] [::tcl::process]
+
+2018-03-12 [TIP 490] add oo support for msgcat => msgcat 1.7.0 (oehlmann)
+
+2018-03-12 [TIP 499] custom locale preference list (oehlmann)
+=> msgcat 1.7.0
+
+2018-03-20 [TIP 503] End CONST84 support for Tcl 8.3 (porter)
+
+2018-03-30 Refactored [lrange] (spjuth)
+
+2018-04-20 [TIP 389] Unicode beyond BMP (nijtmans)
+
+2018-04-20 [TIP 421] [array for]
+
+2018-05-11 [TIP 425] Windows panic callback use of UTF-8
+
+2018-05-17 [TIP 491] Phase out --disable-threads support
+
+2018-06-03 [TIP 500] TclOO Private Methods and Variables
+
+2018-07-26 (bug)[ba921a] [string cat] of bytearrays (coulter,porter)
+
+2018-09-02 [TIP 478] Many new features in TclOO (lester,fellows)
+
+2018-09-04 (bug)[540bed] [binary format w] from bignum (nijtmans)
+
+2018-09-12 [TIP 430] zipfs and embedded script library (woods)
+
+2018-09-26 [TIP 508] [array default] (bonnet,fellows)
+
+2018-09-27 [TIP 515] level value reform (nijtmans)
+
+2018-09-27 [TIP 516] More OO slot operations (fellows)
+
+2018-09-27 [TIP 426] [info cmdtype] (fellows)
+
+2018-09-28 [TIP 509] Cross platform reentrant mutex
+
+2018-10-08 [TIP 514] native integers are 64-bit
+
+2018-10-12 [TIP 502] index value reform (porter)
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 406] http cookies (fellows)
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 445] Tcl_ObjType utilities (migrate to Tcl 9) (porter)
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 501] [string is dict]
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 519] inline export/unexport option for [oo::define]
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 523] [lpop]
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 524] TclOO custom dialects
+
+2018-11-06 [TIP 506] Tcl_(Incr|Decr)RefCount macros -> functions (porter)
+
+2018-11-15 [TIP 512] No stub for Tcl_SetExitProc()
+
+2019-04-08 (bug)[45b9fa] crash in [try] (coulter)
+
+2019-04-14 [TIP 160] terminal and serial channel controls
+
+2019-04-14 [TIP 312] more types for Tcl_LinkVar
+
+2019-04-14 [TIP 367] [lremove]
+
+2019-04-14 [TIP 504] [string insert]
+
+2019-04-16 [TIP 342] [dict getwithdefault]
+
+2019-05-25 [TIP 431] [file tempdir]
+
+2019-05-25 [TIP 383] [coroinject], [coroprobe]
+
+2019-05-31 [TIP 544] Tcl_GetIntForIndex()
+
+2019-06-12 Replace TclOffset() with offsetof()
+
+2019-06-15 [TIP 461] string compare operators for [expr]
+
+2019-06-16 [TIP 521] floating point classification functions for [expr]
+
+2019-06-20 (bug)[6bdadf] crash multi-arg traced [lappend] (fellows)
+
+2019-06-28 [TIP 547] New encodings utf-16, ucs-2
+
+2019-09-14 [TIP 414] Tcl_InitSubsystems()
+
+2019-09-14 [TIP 548] wchar_t conversion functions
+
+- Released 8.7a3, Nov 21, 2019 --- http://core.tcl-lang.org/tcl/ for details -
@@ -73,6 +73,7 @@ int fake_getnameinfo(const struct sockaddr *sa, size_t salen, char *host,
 	struct sockaddr_in *sin = (struct sockaddr_in *)sa;
 	struct hostent *hp;
 	char tmpserv[16];
+	(void)salen;

 	if (sa->sa_family != AF_UNSPEC && sa->sa_family != AF_INET)
 		return (EAI_FAMILY);
@@ -153,7 +154,7 @@ addrinfo *malloc_ai(int port, u_long addr, const struct addrinfo *hints)
 {
 	struct addrinfo *ai;

-	ai = malloc(sizeof(*ai) + sizeof(struct sockaddr_in));
+	ai = (struct addrinfo *)malloc(sizeof(*ai) + sizeof(struct sockaddr_in));
 	if (ai == NULL)
 		return (NULL);

@@ -1,14 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * float.h --
- *
- *	This is a dummy header file to #include in Tcl when there
- *	is no float.h in /usr/include.  Right now this file is empty:
- *	Tcl contains #ifdefs to deal with the lack of definitions;
- *	all it needs is for the #include statement to work.
- *
- * Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
- * Copyright (c) 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
- *
- * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
- * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
- */
@@ -13,6 +13,7 @@
 #include <fcntl.h>
 #include <stdlib.h>
 #include <unistd.h>
+#include <string.h>

 /*
 *----------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -32,19 +33,19 @@

 int
 mkstemp(
-    char *template)		/* Template for filename. */
+    char *tmpl)		/* Template for filename. */
 {
    static const char alphanumerics[] =
 	"abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789";
    char *a, *b;
    int fd, count, alphanumericsLen = strlen(alphanumerics); /* == 62 */

-    a = template + strlen(template);
-    while (a > template && *(a-1) == 'X') {
+    a = tmpl + strlen(tmpl);
+    while (a > tmpl && *(a-1) == 'X') {
 	a--;
    }

-    if (a == template) {
+    if (a == tmpl) {
 	errno = ENOENT;
 	return -1;
    }
@@ -71,7 +72,7 @@ mkstemp(
 	 * Template is now realized; try to open (with correct options).
 	 */

-	fd = open(template, O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_EXCL, 0600);
+	fd = open(tmpl, O_RDWR|O_CREAT|O_EXCL, 0600);
    } while (fd == -1 && errno == EEXIST && --count > 0);

    return fd;
@@ -106,5 +106,5 @@ closedir(
    close(dirp->dd_fd);
    dirp->dd_fd = -1;
    dirp->dd_loc = 0;
-    ckfree((char *)dirp);
+    ckfree(dirp);
 }
@@ -0,0 +1,919 @@
+/*  A portable stdint.h
+ ****************************************************************************
+ *  BSD License:
+ ****************************************************************************
+ *
+ *  Copyright (c) 2005-2016 Paul Hsieh
+ *  All rights reserved.
+ *
+ *  Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ *  modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ *  are met:
+ *
+ *  1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *     notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ *  2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *     notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *     documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ *  3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products
+ *     derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ *  THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
+ *  IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
+ *  OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
+ *  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
+ *  INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
+ *  NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
+ *  DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
+ *  THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
+ *  (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
+ *  THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ ****************************************************************************
+ *
+ *  Version 0.1.16.0
+ *
+ *  The ANSI C standard committee, for the C99 standard, specified the
+ *  inclusion of a new standard include file called stdint.h.  This is
+ *  a very useful and long desired include file which contains several
+ *  very precise definitions for integer scalar types that is critically
+ *  important for making several classes of applications portable
+ *  including cryptography, hashing, variable length integer libraries
+ *  and so on.  But for most developers its likely useful just for
+ *  programming sanity.
+ *
+ *  The problem is that some compiler vendors chose to ignore the C99
+ *  standard and some older compilers have no opportunity to be updated.
+ *  Because of this situation, simply including stdint.h in your code
+ *  makes it unportable.
+ *
+ *  So that's what this file is all about.  It's an attempt to build a
+ *  single universal include file that works on as many platforms as
+ *  possible to deliver what stdint.h is supposed to.  Even compilers
+ *  that already come with stdint.h can use this file instead without
+ *  any loss of functionality.  A few things that should be noted about
+ *  this file:
+ *
+ *    1) It is not guaranteed to be portable and/or present an identical
+ *       interface on all platforms.  The extreme variability of the
+ *       ANSI C standard makes this an impossibility right from the
+ *       very get go. Its really only meant to be useful for the vast
+ *       majority of platforms that possess the capability of
+ *       implementing usefully and precisely defined, standard sized
+ *       integer scalars.  Systems which are not intrinsically 2s
+ *       complement may produce invalid constants.
+ *
+ *    2) There is an unavoidable use of non-reserved symbols.
+ *
+ *    3) Other standard include files are invoked.
+ *
+ *    4) This file may come in conflict with future platforms that do
+ *       include stdint.h.  The hope is that one or the other can be
+ *       used with no real difference.
+ *
+ *    5) In the current version, if your platform can't represent
+ *       int32_t, int16_t and int8_t, it just dumps out with a compiler
+ *       error.
+ *
+ *    6) 64 bit integers may or may not be defined.  Test for their
+ *       presence with the test: #ifdef INT64_MAX or #ifdef UINT64_MAX.
+ *       Note that this is different from the C99 specification which
+ *       requires the existence of 64 bit support in the compiler.  If
+ *       this is not defined for your platform, yet it is capable of
+ *       dealing with 64 bits then it is because this file has not yet
+ *       been extended to cover all of your system's capabilities.
+ *
+ *    7) (u)intptr_t may or may not be defined.  Test for its presence
+ *       with the test: #ifdef PTRDIFF_MAX.  If this is not defined
+ *       for your platform, then it is because this file has not yet
+ *       been extended to cover all of your system's capabilities, not
+ *       because its optional.
+ *
+ *    8) The following might not been defined even if your platform is
+ *       capable of defining it:
+ *
+ *       WCHAR_MIN
+ *       WCHAR_MAX
+ *       (u)int64_t
+ *       PTRDIFF_MIN
+ *       PTRDIFF_MAX
+ *       (u)intptr_t
+ *
+ *    9) The following have not been defined:
+ *
+ *       WINT_MIN
+ *       WINT_MAX
+ *
+ *   10) The criteria for defining (u)int_least(*)_t isn't clear,
+ *       except for systems which don't have a type that precisely
+ *       defined 8, 16, or 32 bit types (which this include file does
+ *       not support anyways). Default definitions have been given.
+ *
+ *   11) The criteria for defining (u)int_fast(*)_t isn't something I
+ *       would trust to any particular compiler vendor or the ANSI C
+ *       committee.  It is well known that "compatible systems" are
+ *       commonly created that have very different performance
+ *       characteristics from the systems they are compatible with,
+ *       especially those whose vendors make both the compiler and the
+ *       system.  Default definitions have been given, but its strongly
+ *       recommended that users never use these definitions for any
+ *       reason (they do *NOT* deliver any serious guarantee of
+ *       improved performance -- not in this file, nor any vendor's
+ *       stdint.h).
+ *
+ *   12) The following macros:
+ *
+ *       PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_LEAST64_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_LEAST32_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_LEAST16_MODIFIER
+ *       PRINTF_INTPTR_MODIFIER
+ *
+ *       are strings which have been defined as the modifiers required
+ *       for the "d", "u" and "x" printf formats to correctly output
+ *       (u)intmax_t, (u)int64_t, (u)int32_t, (u)int16_t, (u)least64_t,
+ *       (u)least32_t, (u)least16_t and (u)intptr_t types respectively.
+ *       PRINTF_INTPTR_MODIFIER is not defined for some systems which
+ *       provide their own stdint.h.  PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER is not
+ *       defined if INT64_MAX is not defined.  These are an extension
+ *       beyond what C99 specifies must be in stdint.h.
+ *
+ *       In addition, the following macros are defined:
+ *
+ *       PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT64_HEX_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT32_HEX_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT16_HEX_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT8_HEX_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_INT16_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_UINT8_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_UINTMAX_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_UINT16_DEC_WIDTH
+ *       PRINTF_UINT8_DEC_WIDTH
+ *
+ *       Which specifies the maximum number of characters required to
+ *       print the number of that type in either hexadecimal or decimal.
+ *       These are an extension beyond what C99 specifies must be in
+ *       stdint.h.
+ *
+ *  Compilers tested (all with 0 warnings at their highest respective
+ *  settings): Borland Turbo C 2.0, WATCOM C/C++ 11.0 (16 bits and 32
+ *  bits), Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0 (32 bit), Microsoft Visual Studio
+ *  .net (VC7), Intel C++ 4.0, GNU gcc v3.3.3
+ *
+ *  This file should be considered a work in progress.  Suggestions for
+ *  improvements, especially those which increase coverage are strongly
+ *  encouraged.
+ *
+ *  Acknowledgements
+ *
+ *  The following people have made significant contributions to the
+ *  development and testing of this file:
+ *
+ *  Chris Howie
+ *  John Steele Scott
+ *  Dave Thorup
+ *  John Dill
+ *  Florian Wobbe
+ *  Christopher Sean Morrison
+ *  Mikkel Fahnoe Jorgensen
+ *
+ */
+
+#include <stddef.h>
+#include <limits.h>
+#include <signal.h>
+
+/*
+ *  For gcc with _STDINT_H, fill in the PRINTF_INT*_MODIFIER macros, and
+ *  do nothing else.  On the Mac OS X version of gcc this is _STDINT_H_.
+ */
+
+#if ((defined(__SUNPRO_C) && __SUNPRO_C >= 0x570) || (defined(_MSC_VER) && _MSC_VER >= 1600) || (defined(__STDC__) && __STDC__ && defined(__STDC_VERSION__) && __STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) || (defined (__WATCOMC__) && (defined (_STDINT_H_INCLUDED) || __WATCOMC__ >= 1250)) || (defined(__GNUC__) && (__GNUC__ > 3 || defined(_STDINT_H) || defined(_STDINT_H_) || defined (__UINT_FAST64_TYPE__)) )) && !defined (_PSTDINT_H_INCLUDED)
+#include <stdint.h>
+#define _PSTDINT_H_INCLUDED
+# if defined(__GNUC__) && (defined(__x86_64__) || defined(__ppc64__)) && !(defined(__APPLE__) && defined(__MACH__))
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "l"
+#  endif
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER ""
+#  endif
+# else
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "ll"
+#  endif
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#   if (UINT_MAX == UINT32_MAX)
+#    define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER ""
+#   else
+#    define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "l"
+#   endif
+#  endif
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER "h"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT64_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT64_HEX_WIDTH "16"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT64_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT64_HEX_WIDTH "16"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_HEX_WIDTH "8"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT32_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT32_HEX_WIDTH "8"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_HEX_WIDTH "4"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT16_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT16_HEX_WIDTH "4"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT8_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT8_HEX_WIDTH "2"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT8_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT8_HEX_WIDTH "2"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH "19"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH "20"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH "10"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH "10"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_DEC_WIDTH "5"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT16_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT16_DEC_WIDTH "5"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT8_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INT8_DEC_WIDTH "3"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINT8_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINT8_DEC_WIDTH "3"
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH PRINTF_UINT64_HEX_WIDTH
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINTMAX_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINTMAX_HEX_WIDTH PRINTF_UINT64_HEX_WIDTH
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_UINTMAX_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_UINTMAX_DEC_WIDTH PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH
+# endif
+
+/*
+ *  Something really weird is going on with Open Watcom.  Just pull some of
+ *  these duplicated definitions from Open Watcom's stdint.h file for now.
+ */
+
+# if defined (__WATCOMC__) && __WATCOMC__ >= 1250
+#  if !defined (INT64_C)
+#   define INT64_C(x)   (x + (INT64_MAX - INT64_MAX))
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (UINT64_C)
+#   define UINT64_C(x)  (x + (UINT64_MAX - UINT64_MAX))
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INT32_C)
+#   define INT32_C(x)   (x + (INT32_MAX - INT32_MAX))
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (UINT32_C)
+#   define UINT32_C(x)  (x + (UINT32_MAX - UINT32_MAX))
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INT16_C)
+#   define INT16_C(x)   (x)
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (UINT16_C)
+#   define UINT16_C(x)  (x)
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INT8_C)
+#   define INT8_C(x)   (x)
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (UINT8_C)
+#   define UINT8_C(x)  (x)
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (UINT64_MAX)
+#   define UINT64_MAX  18446744073709551615ULL
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INT64_MAX)
+#   define INT64_MAX  9223372036854775807LL
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (UINT32_MAX)
+#   define UINT32_MAX  4294967295UL
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INT32_MAX)
+#   define INT32_MAX  2147483647L
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INTMAX_MAX)
+#   define INTMAX_MAX INT64_MAX
+#  endif
+#  if !defined (INTMAX_MIN)
+#   define INTMAX_MIN INT64_MIN
+#  endif
+# endif
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  I have no idea what is the truly correct thing to do on older Solaris.
+ *  From some online discussions, this seems to be what is being
+ *  recommended.  For people who actually are developing on older Solaris,
+ *  what I would like to know is, does this define all of the relevant
+ *  macros of a complete stdint.h?  Remember, in pstdint.h 64 bit is
+ *  considered optional.
+ */
+
+#if (defined(__SUNPRO_C) && __SUNPRO_C >= 0x420) && !defined(_PSTDINT_H_INCLUDED)
+#include <sys/inttypes.h>
+#define _PSTDINT_H_INCLUDED
+#endif
+
+#ifndef _PSTDINT_H_INCLUDED
+#define _PSTDINT_H_INCLUDED
+
+#ifndef SIZE_MAX
+# define SIZE_MAX ((size_t)-1)
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  Deduce the type assignments from limits.h under the assumption that
+ *  integer sizes in bits are powers of 2, and follow the ANSI
+ *  definitions.
+ */
+
+#ifndef UINT8_MAX
+# define UINT8_MAX 0xff
+#endif
+#if !defined(uint8_t) && !defined(_UINT8_T) && !defined(vxWorks)
+# if (UCHAR_MAX == UINT8_MAX) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+    typedef unsigned char uint8_t;
+#   define UINT8_C(v) ((uint8_t) v)
+# else
+#   error "Platform not supported"
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef INT8_MAX
+# define INT8_MAX 0x7f
+#endif
+#ifndef INT8_MIN
+# define INT8_MIN INT8_C(0x80)
+#endif
+#if !defined(int8_t) && !defined(_INT8_T) && !defined(vxWorks)
+# if (SCHAR_MAX == INT8_MAX) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+    typedef signed char int8_t;
+#   define INT8_C(v) ((int8_t) v)
+# else
+#   error "Platform not supported"
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UINT16_MAX
+# define UINT16_MAX 0xffff
+#endif
+#if !defined(uint16_t) && !defined(_UINT16_T) && !defined(vxWorks)
+#if (UINT_MAX == UINT16_MAX) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+  typedef unsigned int uint16_t;
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER ""
+# endif
+# define UINT16_C(v) ((uint16_t) (v))
+#elif (USHRT_MAX == UINT16_MAX)
+  typedef unsigned short uint16_t;
+# define UINT16_C(v) ((uint16_t) (v))
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER "h"
+# endif
+#else
+#error "Platform not supported"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef INT16_MAX
+# define INT16_MAX 0x7fff
+#endif
+#ifndef INT16_MIN
+# define INT16_MIN INT16_C(0x8000)
+#endif
+#if !defined(int16_t) && !defined(_INT16_T) && !defined(vxWorks)
+#if (INT_MAX == INT16_MAX) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+  typedef signed int int16_t;
+# define INT16_C(v) ((int16_t) (v))
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER ""
+# endif
+#elif (SHRT_MAX == INT16_MAX)
+  typedef signed short int16_t;
+# define INT16_C(v) ((int16_t) (v))
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER "h"
+# endif
+#else
+#error "Platform not supported"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UINT32_MAX
+# define UINT32_MAX (0xffffffffUL)
+#endif
+#if !defined(uint32_t) && !defined(_UINT32_T) && !defined(vxWorks)
+#if (ULONG_MAX == UINT32_MAX) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+  typedef unsigned long uint32_t;
+# define UINT32_C(v) v ## UL
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "l"
+# endif
+#elif (UINT_MAX == UINT32_MAX)
+  typedef unsigned int uint32_t;
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER ""
+# endif
+# define UINT32_C(v) v ## U
+#elif (USHRT_MAX == UINT32_MAX)
+  typedef unsigned short uint32_t;
+# define UINT32_C(v) ((unsigned short) (v))
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER ""
+# endif
+#else
+#error "Platform not supported"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+#ifndef INT32_MAX
+# define INT32_MAX (0x7fffffffL)
+#endif
+#ifndef INT32_MIN
+# define INT32_MIN INT32_C(0x80000000)
+#endif
+#if !defined(int32_t) && !defined(_INT32_T) && !defined(vxWorks)
+#if (LONG_MAX == INT32_MAX) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+  typedef signed long int32_t;
+# define INT32_C(v) v ## L
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "l"
+# endif
+#elif (INT_MAX == INT32_MAX)
+  typedef signed int int32_t;
+# define INT32_C(v) v
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER ""
+# endif
+#elif (SHRT_MAX == INT32_MAX)
+  typedef signed short int32_t;
+# define INT32_C(v) ((short) (v))
+# ifndef PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+#  define PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER ""
+# endif
+#else
+#error "Platform not supported"
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  The macro stdint_int64_defined is temporarily used to record
+ *  whether or not 64 integer support is available.  It must be
+ *  defined for any 64 integer extensions for new platforms that are
+ *  added.
+ */
+
+#undef stdint_int64_defined
+#if (defined(__STDC__) && defined(__STDC_VERSION__)) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+# if (__STDC__ && __STDC_VERSION__ >= 199901L) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+#  define stdint_int64_defined
+   typedef long long int64_t;
+   typedef unsigned long long uint64_t;
+#  define UINT64_C(v) v ## ULL
+#  define  INT64_C(v) v ## LL
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "ll"
+#  endif
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#if !defined (stdint_int64_defined)
+# if defined(__GNUC__) && !defined(vxWorks)
+#  define stdint_int64_defined
+   __extension__ typedef long long int64_t;
+   __extension__ typedef unsigned long long uint64_t;
+#  define UINT64_C(v) v ## ULL
+#  define  INT64_C(v) v ## LL
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "ll"
+#  endif
+# elif defined(__MWERKS__) || defined (__SUNPRO_C) || defined (__SUNPRO_CC) || defined (__APPLE_CC__) || defined (_LONG_LONG) || defined (_CRAYC) || defined (S_SPLINT_S)
+#  define stdint_int64_defined
+   typedef long long int64_t;
+   typedef unsigned long long uint64_t;
+#  define UINT64_C(v) v ## ULL
+#  define  INT64_C(v) v ## LL
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "ll"
+#  endif
+# elif (defined(__WATCOMC__) && defined(__WATCOM_INT64__)) || (defined(_MSC_VER) && _INTEGRAL_MAX_BITS >= 64) || (defined (__BORLANDC__) && __BORLANDC__ > 0x460) || defined (__alpha) || defined (__DECC)
+#  define stdint_int64_defined
+   typedef __int64 int64_t;
+   typedef unsigned __int64 uint64_t;
+#  define UINT64_C(v) v ## UI64
+#  define  INT64_C(v) v ## I64
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "I64"
+#  endif
+# endif
+#endif
+
+#if !defined (LONG_LONG_MAX) && defined (INT64_C)
+# define LONG_LONG_MAX INT64_C (9223372036854775807)
+#endif
+#ifndef ULONG_LONG_MAX
+# define ULONG_LONG_MAX UINT64_C (18446744073709551615)
+#endif
+
+#if !defined (INT64_MAX) && defined (INT64_C)
+# define INT64_MAX INT64_C (9223372036854775807)
+#endif
+#if !defined (INT64_MIN) && defined (INT64_C)
+# define INT64_MIN INT64_C (-9223372036854775808)
+#endif
+#if !defined (UINT64_MAX) && defined (INT64_C)
+# define UINT64_MAX UINT64_C (18446744073709551615)
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  Width of hexadecimal for number field.
+ */
+
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT64_HEX_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT64_HEX_WIDTH "16"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT32_HEX_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT32_HEX_WIDTH "8"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT16_HEX_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT16_HEX_WIDTH "4"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT8_HEX_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT8_HEX_WIDTH "2"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH "19"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH "10"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT16_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT16_DEC_WIDTH "5"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_INT8_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_INT8_DEC_WIDTH "3"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH "20"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH "10"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_UINT16_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_UINT16_DEC_WIDTH "5"
+#endif
+#ifndef PRINTF_UINT8_DEC_WIDTH
+# define PRINTF_UINT8_DEC_WIDTH "3"
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  Ok, lets not worry about 128 bit integers for now.  Moore's law says
+ *  we don't need to worry about that until about 2040 at which point
+ *  we'll have bigger things to worry about.
+ */
+
+#ifdef stdint_int64_defined
+  typedef int64_t intmax_t;
+  typedef uint64_t uintmax_t;
+# define  INTMAX_MAX   INT64_MAX
+# define  INTMAX_MIN   INT64_MIN
+# define UINTMAX_MAX  UINT64_MAX
+# define UINTMAX_C(v) UINT64_C(v)
+# define  INTMAX_C(v)  INT64_C(v)
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH PRINTF_INT64_HEX_WIDTH
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH
+# endif
+#else
+  typedef int32_t intmax_t;
+  typedef uint32_t uintmax_t;
+# define  INTMAX_MAX   INT32_MAX
+# define UINTMAX_MAX  UINT32_MAX
+# define UINTMAX_C(v) UINT32_C(v)
+# define  INTMAX_C(v)  INT32_C(v)
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER
+#   define PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_HEX_WIDTH PRINTF_INT32_HEX_WIDTH
+# endif
+# ifndef PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH
+#  define PRINTF_INTMAX_DEC_WIDTH PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH
+# endif
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  Because this file currently only supports platforms which have
+ *  precise powers of 2 as bit sizes for the default integers, the
+ *  least definitions are all trivial.  Its possible that a future
+ *  version of this file could have different definitions.
+ */
+
+#ifndef stdint_least_defined
+  typedef   int8_t   int_least8_t;
+  typedef  uint8_t  uint_least8_t;
+  typedef  int16_t  int_least16_t;
+  typedef uint16_t uint_least16_t;
+  typedef  int32_t  int_least32_t;
+  typedef uint32_t uint_least32_t;
+# define PRINTF_LEAST32_MODIFIER PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER
+# define PRINTF_LEAST16_MODIFIER PRINTF_INT16_MODIFIER
+# define  UINT_LEAST8_MAX  UINT8_MAX
+# define   INT_LEAST8_MAX   INT8_MAX
+# define UINT_LEAST16_MAX UINT16_MAX
+# define  INT_LEAST16_MAX  INT16_MAX
+# define UINT_LEAST32_MAX UINT32_MAX
+# define  INT_LEAST32_MAX  INT32_MAX
+# define   INT_LEAST8_MIN   INT8_MIN
+# define  INT_LEAST16_MIN  INT16_MIN
+# define  INT_LEAST32_MIN  INT32_MIN
+# ifdef stdint_int64_defined
+    typedef  int64_t  int_least64_t;
+    typedef uint64_t uint_least64_t;
+#   define PRINTF_LEAST64_MODIFIER PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER
+#   define UINT_LEAST64_MAX UINT64_MAX
+#   define  INT_LEAST64_MAX  INT64_MAX
+#   define  INT_LEAST64_MIN  INT64_MIN
+# endif
+#endif
+#undef stdint_least_defined
+
+/*
+ *  The ANSI C committee has defined *int*_fast*_t types as well.  This,
+ *  of course, defies rationality -- you can't know what will be fast
+ *  just from the type itself.  Even for a given architecture, compatible
+ *  implementations might have different performance characteristics.
+ *  Developers are warned to stay away from these types when using this
+ *  or any other stdint.h.
+ */
+
+typedef   int_least8_t   int_fast8_t;
+typedef  uint_least8_t  uint_fast8_t;
+typedef  int_least16_t  int_fast16_t;
+typedef uint_least16_t uint_fast16_t;
+typedef  int_least32_t  int_fast32_t;
+typedef uint_least32_t uint_fast32_t;
+#define  UINT_FAST8_MAX  UINT_LEAST8_MAX
+#define   INT_FAST8_MAX   INT_LEAST8_MAX
+#define UINT_FAST16_MAX UINT_LEAST16_MAX
+#define  INT_FAST16_MAX  INT_LEAST16_MAX
+#define UINT_FAST32_MAX UINT_LEAST32_MAX
+#define  INT_FAST32_MAX  INT_LEAST32_MAX
+#define   INT_FAST8_MIN   INT_LEAST8_MIN
+#define  INT_FAST16_MIN  INT_LEAST16_MIN
+#define  INT_FAST32_MIN  INT_LEAST32_MIN
+#ifdef stdint_int64_defined
+  typedef  int_least64_t  int_fast64_t;
+  typedef uint_least64_t uint_fast64_t;
+# define UINT_FAST64_MAX UINT_LEAST64_MAX
+# define  INT_FAST64_MAX  INT_LEAST64_MAX
+# define  INT_FAST64_MIN  INT_LEAST64_MIN
+#endif
+
+#undef stdint_int64_defined
+
+/*
+ *  Whatever piecemeal, per compiler thing we can do about the wchar_t
+ *  type limits.
+ */
+
+#if defined(__WATCOMC__) || defined(_MSC_VER) || defined (__GNUC__) && !defined(vxWorks)
+# include <wchar.h>
+# ifndef WCHAR_MIN
+#  define WCHAR_MIN 0
+# endif
+# ifndef WCHAR_MAX
+#  define WCHAR_MAX ((wchar_t)-1)
+# endif
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  Whatever piecemeal, per compiler/platform thing we can do about the
+ *  (u)intptr_t types and limits.
+ */
+
+#if (defined (_MSC_VER) && defined (_UINTPTR_T_DEFINED)) || defined (_UINTPTR_T)
+# define STDINT_H_UINTPTR_T_DEFINED
+#endif
+
+#ifndef STDINT_H_UINTPTR_T_DEFINED
+# if defined (__alpha__) || defined (__ia64__) || defined (__x86_64__) || defined (_WIN64) || defined (__ppc64__)
+#  define stdint_intptr_bits 64
+# elif defined (__WATCOMC__) || defined (__TURBOC__)
+#  if defined(__TINY__) || defined(__SMALL__) || defined(__MEDIUM__)
+#    define stdint_intptr_bits 16
+#  else
+#    define stdint_intptr_bits 32
+#  endif
+# elif defined (__i386__) || defined (_WIN32) || defined (WIN32) || defined (__ppc64__)
+#  define stdint_intptr_bits 32
+# elif defined (__INTEL_COMPILER)
+/* TODO -- what did Intel do about x86-64? */
+# else
+/* #error "This platform might not be supported yet" */
+# endif
+
+# ifdef stdint_intptr_bits
+#  define stdint_intptr_glue3_i(a,b,c)  a##b##c
+#  define stdint_intptr_glue3(a,b,c)    stdint_intptr_glue3_i(a,b,c)
+#  ifndef PRINTF_INTPTR_MODIFIER
+#    define PRINTF_INTPTR_MODIFIER      stdint_intptr_glue3(PRINTF_INT,stdint_intptr_bits,_MODIFIER)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef PTRDIFF_MAX
+#    define PTRDIFF_MAX                 stdint_intptr_glue3(INT,stdint_intptr_bits,_MAX)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef PTRDIFF_MIN
+#    define PTRDIFF_MIN                 stdint_intptr_glue3(INT,stdint_intptr_bits,_MIN)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef UINTPTR_MAX
+#    define UINTPTR_MAX                 stdint_intptr_glue3(UINT,stdint_intptr_bits,_MAX)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef INTPTR_MAX
+#    define INTPTR_MAX                  stdint_intptr_glue3(INT,stdint_intptr_bits,_MAX)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef INTPTR_MIN
+#    define INTPTR_MIN                  stdint_intptr_glue3(INT,stdint_intptr_bits,_MIN)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef INTPTR_C
+#    define INTPTR_C(x)                 stdint_intptr_glue3(INT,stdint_intptr_bits,_C)(x)
+#  endif
+#  ifndef UINTPTR_C
+#    define UINTPTR_C(x)                stdint_intptr_glue3(UINT,stdint_intptr_bits,_C)(x)
+#  endif
+  typedef stdint_intptr_glue3(uint,stdint_intptr_bits,_t) uintptr_t;
+  typedef stdint_intptr_glue3( int,stdint_intptr_bits,_t)  intptr_t;
+# else
+/* TODO -- This following is likely wrong for some platforms, and does
+   nothing for the definition of uintptr_t. */
+  typedef ptrdiff_t intptr_t;
+# endif
+# define STDINT_H_UINTPTR_T_DEFINED
+#endif
+
+/*
+ *  Assumes sig_atomic_t is signed and we have a 2s complement machine.
+ */
+
+#ifndef SIG_ATOMIC_MAX
+# define SIG_ATOMIC_MAX ((((sig_atomic_t) 1) << (sizeof (sig_atomic_t)*CHAR_BIT-1)) - 1)
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+#if defined (__TEST_PSTDINT_FOR_CORRECTNESS)
+
+/*
+ *  Please compile with the maximum warning settings to make sure macros are
+ *  not defined more than once.
+ */
+
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <string.h>
+
+#define glue3_aux(x,y,z) x ## y ## z
+#define glue3(x,y,z) glue3_aux(x,y,z)
+
+#define DECLU(bits) glue3(uint,bits,_t) glue3(u,bits,) = glue3(UINT,bits,_C) (0);
+#define DECLI(bits) glue3(int,bits,_t) glue3(i,bits,) = glue3(INT,bits,_C) (0);
+
+#define DECL(us,bits) glue3(DECL,us,) (bits)
+
+#define TESTUMAX(bits) glue3(u,bits,) = ~glue3(u,bits,); if (glue3(UINT,bits,_MAX) != glue3(u,bits,)) printf ("Something wrong with UINT%d_MAX\n", bits)
+
+#define REPORTERROR(msg) { err_n++; if (err_first <= 0) err_first = __LINE__; printf msg; }
+
+#define X_SIZE_MAX ((size_t)-1)
+
+int main () {
+	int err_n = 0;
+	int err_first = 0;
+	DECL(I,8)
+	DECL(U,8)
+	DECL(I,16)
+	DECL(U,16)
+	DECL(I,32)
+	DECL(U,32)
+#ifdef INT64_MAX
+	DECL(I,64)
+	DECL(U,64)
+#endif
+	intmax_t imax = INTMAX_C(0);
+	uintmax_t umax = UINTMAX_C(0);
+	char str0[256], str1[256];
+
+	sprintf (str0, "%" PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "d", INT32_C(2147483647));
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, "2147483647")) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER : %s\n", str0));
+	if (atoi(PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH) != (int) strlen(str0)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH : %s\n", PRINTF_INT32_DEC_WIDTH));
+	sprintf (str0, "%" PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "u", UINT32_C(4294967295));
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, "4294967295")) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER : %s\n", str0));
+	if (atoi(PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH) != (int) strlen(str0)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH : %s\n", PRINTF_UINT32_DEC_WIDTH));
+#ifdef INT64_MAX
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "d", INT64_C(9223372036854775807));
+	if (0 != strcmp (str1, "9223372036854775807")) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER : %s\n", str1));
+	if (atoi(PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH) != (int) strlen(str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH : %s, %d\n", PRINTF_INT64_DEC_WIDTH, (int) strlen(str1)));
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "u", UINT64_C(18446744073709550591));
+	if (0 != strcmp (str1, "18446744073709550591")) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER : %s\n", str1));
+	if (atoi(PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH) != (int) strlen(str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH : %s, %d\n", PRINTF_UINT64_DEC_WIDTH, (int) strlen(str1)));
+#endif
+
+	sprintf (str0, "%d %x\n", 0, ~0);
+
+	sprintf (str1, "%d %x\n",  i8, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with i8 : %s\n", str1));
+	sprintf (str1, "%u %x\n",  u8, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with u8 : %s\n", str1));
+	sprintf (str1, "%d %x\n",  i16, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with i16 : %s\n", str1));
+	sprintf (str1, "%u %x\n",  u16, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with u16 : %s\n", str1));
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "d %x\n",  i32, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with i32 : %s\n", str1));
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INT32_MODIFIER "u %x\n",  u32, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with u32 : %s\n", str1));
+#ifdef INT64_MAX
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "d %x\n",  i64, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with i64 : %s\n", str1));
+#endif
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER "d %x\n",  imax, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with imax : %s\n", str1));
+	sprintf (str1, "%" PRINTF_INTMAX_MODIFIER "u %x\n",  umax, ~0);
+	if (0 != strcmp (str0, str1)) REPORTERROR (("Something wrong with umax : %s\n", str1));
+
+	TESTUMAX(8);
+	TESTUMAX(16);
+	TESTUMAX(32);
+#ifdef INT64_MAX
+	TESTUMAX(64);
+#endif
+
+#define STR(v) #v
+#define Q(v) printf ("sizeof " STR(v) " = %u\n", (unsigned) sizeof (v));
+	if (err_n) {
+		printf ("pstdint.h is not correct.  Please use sizes below to correct it:\n");
+	}
+
+	Q(int)
+	Q(unsigned)
+	Q(long int)
+	Q(short int)
+	Q(int8_t)
+	Q(int16_t)
+	Q(int32_t)
+#ifdef INT64_MAX
+	Q(int64_t)
+#endif
+
+#if UINT_MAX < X_SIZE_MAX
+	printf ("UINT_MAX < X_SIZE_MAX\n");
+#else
+	printf ("UINT_MAX >= X_SIZE_MAX\n");
+#endif
+	printf ("%" PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "u vs %" PRINTF_INT64_MODIFIER "u\n", UINT_MAX, X_SIZE_MAX);
+
+	return EXIT_SUCCESS;
+}
+
+#endif
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 *	This file isn't complete in the ANSI-C sense; it only declares things
 *	that are needed by Tcl. This file is needed even on many systems with
 *	their own stdlib.h (e.g. SunOS) because not all stdlib.h files declare
- *	all the procedures needed here (such as strtod).
+ *	all the procedures needed here (such as strtol/strtoul).
 *
 * Copyright (c) 1991 The Regents of the University of California.
 * Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
@@ -21,19 +21,15 @@

 #include <sys/types.h>

-#ifdef __APPLE__
 extern void *		memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
-#else
-extern char *		memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);
-#endif
 extern int		memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);
-extern char *		memcpy(void *t, const void *f, size_t n);
+extern void *		memcpy(void *t, const void *f, size_t n);
 #ifdef NO_MEMMOVE
 #define memmove(d,s,n)	(bcopy((s), (d), (n)))
 #else
 extern char *		memmove(void *t, const void *f, size_t n);
 #endif
-extern char *		memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);
+extern void *		memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);

 extern int		strcasecmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);
 extern char *		strcat(char *dst, const char *src);
@@ -1,76 +0,0 @@
-/*
- * unistd.h --
- *
- *      Macros, constants and prototypes for Posix conformance.
- *
- * Copyright 1989 Regents of the University of California Permission to use,
- * copy, modify, and distribute this software and its documentation for any
- * purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above
- * copyright notice appear in all copies. The University of California makes
- * no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose.
- * It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.
- */
-
-#ifndef _UNISTD
-#define _UNISTD
-
-#include <sys/types.h>
-
-#ifndef NULL
-#define NULL    0
-#endif
-
-/*
- * Strict POSIX stuff goes here. Extensions go down below, in the ifndef
- * _POSIX_SOURCE section.
- */
-
-extern void		_exit(int status);
-extern int		access(const char *path, int mode);
-extern int		chdir(const char *path);
-extern int		chown(const char *path, uid_t owner, gid_t group);
-extern int		close(int fd);
-extern int		dup(int oldfd);
-extern int		dup2(int oldfd, int newfd);
-extern int		execl(const char *path, ...);
-extern int		execle(const char *path, ...);
-extern int		execlp(const char *file, ...);
-extern int		execv(const char *path, char **argv);
-extern int		execve(const char *path, char **argv, char **envp);
-extern int		execvpw(const char *file, char **argv);
-extern pid_t		fork(void);
-extern char *		getcwd(char *buf, size_t size);
-extern gid_t		getegid(void);
-extern uid_t		geteuid(void);
-extern gid_t		getgid(void);
-extern int		getgroups(int bufSize, int *buffer);
-extern pid_t		getpid(void);
-extern uid_t		getuid(void);
-extern int		isatty(int fd);
-extern long		lseek(int fd, long offset, int whence);
-extern int		pipe(int *fildes);
-extern int		read(int fd, char *buf, size_t size);
-extern int		setgid(gid_t group);
-extern int		setuid(uid_t user);
-extern unsigned		sleep(unsigned seconds);
-extern char *		ttyname(int fd);
-extern int		unlink(const char *path);
-extern int		write(int fd, const char *buf, size_t size);
-
-#ifndef	_POSIX_SOURCE
-extern char *		crypt(const char *, const char *);
-extern int		fchown(int fd, uid_t owner, gid_t group);
-extern int		flock(int fd, int operation);
-extern int		ftruncate(int fd, unsigned long length);
-extern int		ioctl(int fd, int request, ...);
-extern int		readlink(const char *path, char *buf, int bufsize);
-extern int		setegid(gid_t group);
-extern int		seteuidw(uid_t user);
-extern int		setreuid(int ruid, int euid);
-extern int		symlink(const char *, const char *);
-extern int		ttyslot(void);
-extern int		truncate(const char *path, unsigned long length);
-extern int		vfork(void);
-#endif /* _POSIX_SOURCE */
-
-#endif /* _UNISTD */
@@ -100,7 +100,7 @@ waitpid(
 	} else {
 	    prevPtr->nextPtr = waitPtr->nextPtr;
 	}
-	ckfree((char *) waitPtr);
+	ckfree(waitPtr);
 	return result;
    }

@@ -119,7 +119,7 @@ retrieve the stack trace when script evaluation returns
 \fBTCL_ERROR\fR, like so:
 .PP
 .CS
-int code = Tcl_Eval(interp, script);
+int code = Tcl_EvalEx(interp, script, -1, 0);
 if (code == TCL_ERROR) {
    Tcl_Obj *options = \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR(interp, code);
    Tcl_Obj *key = Tcl_NewStringObj("-errorinfo", -1);
@@ -247,6 +247,9 @@ record instead of a value. Otherwise, it is similar to
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SetErrorCodeVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR except that
 instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.
+Interfaces using argument lists have been found to be nonportable in practice.
+This function is deprecated and will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
+
 .PP
 The procedure \fBTcl_GetErrorLine\fR is used to read the integer value
 of the \fB\-errorline\fR return option without the overhead of a full
@@ -19,47 +19,41 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_MakeSafe\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
-.VS "TIP 581"
 Tcl_Interp *
 \fBTcl_CreateChild\fR(\fIinterp, name, isSafe\fR)
-.VE "TIP 581"
 .sp
 Tcl_Interp *
 \fBTcl_CreateSlave\fR(\fIinterp, name, isSafe\fR)
 .sp
-.VS "TIP 581"
-Tcl_Interp *
-\fBTcl_GetChild\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)
-.VE "TIP 581"
-.sp
 Tcl_Interp *
 \fBTcl_GetSlave\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)
 .sp
-.VS "TIP 581"
 Tcl_Interp *
-\fBTcl_GetParent\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
-.VE "TIP 581"
+\fBTcl_GetChild\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Interp *
 \fBTcl_GetMaster\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
-int
-\fBTcl_GetInterpPath\fR(\fIinterp, slaveInterp\fR)
+Tcl_Interp *
+\fBTcl_GetParent\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR(\fIslaveInterp, slaveCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd,
+\fBTcl_GetInterpPath\fR(\fIinterp, childInterp\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR(\fIchildInterp, childCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd,
                argc, argv\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_CreateAliasObj\fR(\fIslaveInterp, slaveCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd,
+\fBTcl_CreateAliasObj\fR(\fIchildInterp, childCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd,
                   objc, objv\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetAlias\fR(\fIinterp, slaveCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr,
+\fBTcl_GetAlias\fR(\fIinterp, childCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr,
             argcPtr, argvPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetAliasObj\fR(\fIinterp, slaveCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr,
+\fBTcl_GetAliasObj\fR(\fIinterp, childCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr,
                objcPtr, objvPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
@@ -72,16 +66,16 @@ int
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to execute the specified command.
 .AP "const char" *name in
-Name of slave interpreter to create or manipulate.
+Name of child interpreter to create or manipulate.
 .AP int isSafe in
 If non-zero, a
 .QW safe
-slave that is suitable for running untrusted code
-is created, otherwise a trusted slave is created.
-.AP Tcl_Interp *slaveInterp in
+child that is suitable for running untrusted code
+is created, otherwise a trusted child is created.
+.AP Tcl_Interp *childInterp in
 Interpreter to use for creating the source command for an alias (see
 below).
-.AP "const char" *slaveCmd in
+.AP "const char" *childCmd in
 Name of source command for alias.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *targetInterp in
 Interpreter that contains the target command for an alias.
@@ -136,21 +130,19 @@ interpreter. The return value for those procedures that return an \fBint\fR
 is either \fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR. If \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned
 then the interpreter's result contains an error message.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_CreateSlave\fR creates a new interpreter as a slave of \fIinterp\fR.
-It also creates a slave command named \fIslaveName\fR in \fIinterp\fR which
-allows \fIinterp\fR to manipulate the new slave.
-If \fIisSafe\fR is zero, the command creates a trusted slave in which Tcl
+\fBTcl_CreateChild\fR creates a new interpreter as a child of \fIinterp\fR.
+It also creates a child command named \fIname\fR in \fIinterp\fR which
+allows \fIinterp\fR to manipulate the new child.
+If \fIisSafe\fR is zero, the command creates a trusted child in which Tcl
 code has access to all the Tcl commands.
 If it is \fB1\fR, the command creates a
 .QW safe
-slave in which Tcl code has access only to set of Tcl commands defined as
+child in which Tcl code has access only to set of Tcl commands defined as
 .QW "Safe Tcl" ;
 see the manual entry for the Tcl \fBinterp\fR command for details.
-If the creation of the new slave interpreter failed, \fBNULL\fR is returned.
+If the creation of the new child interpreter failed, \fBNULL\fR is returned.
 .PP
-.VS "TIP 581"
-\fBTcl_CreateChild\fR is a synonym for \fBTcl_CreateSlave\fR.
-.VE "TIP 581"
+\fBTcl_CreateSlave\fR is a synonym for \fBTcl_CreateChild\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_IsSafe\fR returns \fB1\fR if \fIinterp\fR is
 .QW safe
@@ -166,42 +158,38 @@ from \fIinterp\fR.  However, it cannot know what parts of an extension
 or application are safe and does not make any attempt to remove those
 parts, so safety is not guaranteed after calling \fBTcl_MakeSafe\fR.
 Callers will want to take care with their use of \fBTcl_MakeSafe\fR
-to avoid false claims of safety.  For many situations, \fBTcl_CreateSlave\fR
+to avoid false claims of safety.  For many situations, \fBTcl_CreateChild\fR
 may be a better choice, since it creates interpreters in a known-safe state.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetSlave\fR returns a pointer to a slave interpreter of
-\fIinterp\fR. The slave interpreter is identified by \fIslaveName\fR.
-If no such slave interpreter exists, \fBNULL\fR is returned.
+\fBTcl_GetChild\fR returns a pointer to a child interpreter of
+\fIinterp\fR. The child interpreter is identified by \fIname\fR.
+If no such child interpreter exists, \fBNULL\fR is returned.
 .PP
-.VS "TIP 581"
-\fBTcl_GetChild\fR is a synonym for \fBTcl_GetSlave\fR.
-.VE "TIP 581"
+\fBTcl_GetSlave\fR is a synonym for \fBTcl_GetChild\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetMaster\fR returns a pointer to the master interpreter of
-\fIinterp\fR. If \fIinterp\fR has no master (it is a
+\fBTcl_GetParent\fR returns a pointer to the parent interpreter of
+\fIinterp\fR. If \fIinterp\fR has no parent (it is a
 top-level interpreter) then \fBNULL\fR is returned.
 .PP
-.VS "TIP 581"
-\fBTcl_GetParent\fR is a synonym for \fBTcl_GetMaster\fR.
-.VE "TIP 581"
+\fBTcl_GetMaster\fR is a synonym for \fBTcl_GetParent\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetInterpPath\fR stores in the result of \fIinterp\fR
-the relative path between \fIinterp\fR and \fIslaveInterp\fR;
-\fIslaveInterp\fR must be a slave of \fIinterp\fR. If the computation
+the relative path between \fIinterp\fR and \fIchildInterp\fR;
+\fIchildInterp\fR must be a child of \fIinterp\fR. If the computation
 of the relative path succeeds, \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned, else
 \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is stored as the
 result of \fIinterp\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR creates a command named \fIslaveCmd\fR in
-\fIslaveInterp\fR that when invoked, will cause the command \fItargetCmd\fR
+\fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR creates a command named \fIchildCmd\fR in
+\fIchildInterp\fR that when invoked, will cause the command \fItargetCmd\fR
 to be invoked in \fItargetInterp\fR. The arguments specified by the strings
 contained in \fIargv\fR are always prepended to any arguments supplied in the
-invocation of \fIslaveCmd\fR and passed to \fItargetCmd\fR.
+invocation of \fIchildCmd\fR and passed to \fItargetCmd\fR.
 This operation returns \fBTCL_OK\fR if it succeeds, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR if
 it fails; in that case, an error message is left in the value result
-of \fIslaveInterp\fR.
+of \fIchildInterp\fR.
 Note that there are no restrictions on the ancestry relationship (as
-created by \fBTcl_CreateSlave\fR) between \fIslaveInterp\fR and
+created by \fBTcl_CreateChild\fR) between \fIchildInterp\fR and
 \fItargetInterp\fR. Any two interpreters can be used, without any
 restrictions on how they are related.
 .PP
@@ -260,4 +248,4 @@ interp

 .SH KEYWORDS
 alias, command, exposed commands, hidden commands, interpreter, invoke,
-master, slave
+parent, child
@@ -22,10 +22,8 @@ Tcl_Interp *
 int
 \fBTcl_InterpDeleted\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.6
 int
 \fBTcl_InterpActive\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
-.VE 8.6
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
@@ -70,14 +68,12 @@ deleted and when the whole interpreter is being deleted. In the former case
 the callback may recreate the data being deleted, but this would lead to an
 infinite loop if the interpreter were being deleted.
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 \fBTcl_InterpActive\fR is useful for determining whether there is any
 execution of scripts ongoing in an interpreter, which is a useful piece of
 information when Tcl is embedded in a garbage-collected environment and it
 becomes necessary to determine whether the interpreter is a candidate for
 deletion. The function returns a true value if the interpreter has at least
 one active execution running inside it, and a false value otherwise.
-.VE 8.6
 .SH "INTERPRETERS AND MEMORY MANAGEMENT"
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DeleteInterp\fR can be called at any time on an interpreter that may
@@ -138,12 +134,10 @@ All uses of interpreters in Tcl and Tk have already been protected.
 Extension writers should ensure that their code also properly protects any
 additional interpreters used, as described above.
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 Note that the protection mechanisms do not work well with conventional garbage
 collection systems. When in such a managed environment, \fBTcl_InterpActive\fR
 should be used to determine when an interpreter is a candidate for deletion
 due to inactivity.
-.VE 8.6
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_Preserve(3), Tcl_Release(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_CreateObjCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandInfo, Tcl_GetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_SetCommandInfo, Tcl_SetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandName, Tcl_GetCommandFullName, Tcl_GetCommandFromObj \- implement new commands in C
+Tcl_CreateObjCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandInfo, Tcl_GetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_SetCommandInfo, Tcl_SetCommandInfoFromToken, Tcl_GetCommandName, Tcl_GetCommandFullName, Tcl_GetCommandFromObj, Tcl_RegisterCommandTypeName, Tcl_GetCommandTypeName \- implement new commands in C
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -42,6 +42,14 @@ void
 .sp
 Tcl_Command
 \fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr\fR)
+.sp
+.VS "info cmdtype feature"
+void
+\fBTcl_RegisterCommandTypeName\fR(\fIproc, typeName\fR)
+.sp
+const char *
+\fBTcl_GetCommandTypeName\fR(\fItoken\fR)
+.VE "info cmdtype feature"
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
@@ -65,6 +73,9 @@ Pointer to structure containing various information about a
 Tcl command.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
 Value containing the name of a Tcl command.
+.AP "const char" *typeName in
+Indicates the name of the type of command implementation associated
+with a particular \fIproc\fR, or NULL to break the association.
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
@@ -296,6 +307,22 @@ is appended to the value specified by \fIobjPtr\fR.
 specified by the name in a \fBTcl_Obj\fR.
 The command name is resolved relative to the current namespace.
 Returns NULL if the command is not found.
+.PP
+.VS "info cmdtype feature"
+\fBTcl_RegisterCommandTypeName\fR is used to associate a name (the
+\fItypeName\fR argument) with a particular implementation function so that it
+can then be looked up with \fBTcl_GetCommandTypeName\fR, which in turn is
+called with a command token that information is wanted for and which returns
+the name of the type that was registered for the implementation function used
+for that command. (The lookup functionality is surfaced virtually directly in Tcl via
+\fBinfo cmdtype\fR.) If there is no function registered for a particular
+function, the result will be the string literal
+.QW \fBnative\fR .
+The registration of a name can be undone by registering a mapping to NULL
+instead. The result from \fBTcl_GetCommandTypeName\fR will be exactly that
+string which was registered, and not a copy; use of a compile-time constant
+string is \fIstrongly recommended\fR.
+.VE "info cmdtype feature"
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_CreateCommand(3), Tcl_ResetResult(3), Tcl_SetObjResult(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_GetEncoding, Tcl_FreeEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingFromObj, Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString, Tcl_ExternalToUtf, Tcl_UtfToExternalDString, Tcl_UtfToExternal, Tcl_WinTCharToUtf, Tcl_WinUtfToTChar, Tcl_GetEncodingName, Tcl_SetSystemEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingNameFromEnvironment, Tcl_GetEncodingNames, Tcl_CreateEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingSearchPath, Tcl_SetEncodingSearchPath, Tcl_GetDefaultEncodingDir, Tcl_SetDefaultEncodingDir \- procedures for creating and using encodings
+Tcl_GetEncoding, Tcl_FreeEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingFromObj, Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString, Tcl_ExternalToUtf, Tcl_UtfToExternalDString, Tcl_UtfToExternal, Tcl_GetEncodingName, Tcl_SetSystemEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingNameFromEnvironment, Tcl_GetEncodingNames, Tcl_CreateEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingSearchPath, Tcl_SetEncodingSearchPath, Tcl_GetDefaultEncodingDir, Tcl_SetDefaultEncodingDir \- procedures for creating and using encodings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -255,11 +255,17 @@ is filled with the corresponding number of bytes that were stored in
 \fIdst\fR.  The return values are the same as the return values for
 \fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_WinUtfToTChar\fR and \fBTcl_WinTCharToUtf\fR are
-Windows-only convenience
-functions for converting between UTF-8 and Windows strings
-based on the TCHAR type which is by convention
-a Unicode character on Windows NT.
+\fBTcl_WinUtfToTChar\fR and \fBTcl_WinTCharToUtf\fR are Windows-only
+convenience functions for converting between UTF-8 and Windows strings
+based on the TCHAR type which is by convention a Unicode character on
+Windows NT. Those functions are deprecated. You can use
+\fBTcl_UtfToWCharDString\fR resp. \fBTcl_WCharToUtfDString\fR as replacement.
+If you want compatibility with earlier Tcl releases than 8.7, use
+\fBTcl_UtfToUniCharDString\fR resp. \fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR as
+replacement, and make sure you compile your extension with -DTCL_UTF_MAX=3.
+Beware: Those replacement functions don't initialize their Tcl_DString (you'll
+have to do that yourself), and \fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR from Tcl 8.6
+doesn't accept -1 as length parameter.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetEncodingName\fR is roughly the inverse of \fBTcl_GetEncoding\fR.
 Given an \fIencoding\fR, the return value is the \fIname\fR argument that
@@ -36,13 +36,11 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_SetEnsembleMappingDict\fR(\fIinterp, token, dictObj\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.6
 int
 \fBTcl_GetEnsembleParameterList\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObjPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_SetEnsembleParameterList\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObj\fR)
-.VE 8.6
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetEnsembleSubcommandList\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObjPtr\fR)
@@ -163,7 +161,6 @@ All command names in prefixes set via \fBTcl_SetEnsembleMappingDict\fR
 must be fully qualified.
 .TP
 \fBformal pre-subcommand parameter list\fR (read-write)
-.VS 8.6
 A list of formal parameter names (the names only being used when generating
 error messages) that come at invocation of the ensemble between the name of
 the ensemble and the subcommand argument. NULL (the default) is equivalent to
@@ -174,7 +171,6 @@ respectively. The result of both of those functions is a Tcl result code
 ensemble) and the
 dictionary obtained from \fBTcl_GetEnsembleParameterList\fR should always be
 treated as immutable even if it is unshared.
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBsubcommand list\fR (read-write)
 .
@@ -150,13 +150,14 @@ equivalent to using the \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR flag (see below).
 of any length, concatenates them into a single string,
 then calls \fBTcl_Eval\fR to execute that string as a Tcl command.
 It returns the result of the command and also modifies
-\fIinterp->result\fR in the same way as \fBTcl_Eval\fR.
+the interpreter result in the same way as \fBTcl_Eval\fR.
 The last argument to \fBTcl_VarEval\fR must be NULL to indicate the end
 of arguments.  \fBTcl_VarEval\fR is now deprecated.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_VarEvalVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_VarEval\fR except that
 instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument
-list. Like \fBTcl_VarEval\fR, \fBTcl_VarEvalVA\fR is deprecated.
+list. Interfaces using argument lists have been found to be nonportable
+in practice. This function is deprecated and will be removed in Tcl 9.0.

 .SH "FLAG BITS"
 .PP
@@ -134,6 +134,9 @@ finalization of Tcl's subsystems via \fBTcl_Finalize\fR at an
 appropriate time.  The argument passed to \fIproc\fR when it is
 invoked will be the exit status code (as passed to \fBTcl_Exit\fR)
 cast to a ClientData value.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetExitProc\fR can not be used in stub-enabled extensions. Its symbol
+entry in the stub table is deprecated and it will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 exit(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
@@ -63,10 +63,8 @@ int
 \fBTcl_FSLoadFile\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr, sym1, sym2, proc1Ptr, proc2Ptr,
               loadHandlePtr, unloadProcPtr\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.6
 int
 \fBTcl_FSUnloadFile\fR(\fIinterp, loadHandle\fR)
-.VE 8.6
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR(\fIinterp, resultPtr, pathPtr, pattern, types\fR)
@@ -146,7 +144,6 @@ Tcl_Obj *
 Tcl_StatBuf *
 \fBTcl_AllocStatBuf\fR()
 .sp
-.VS 8.6
 Tcl_WideInt
 \fBTcl_GetAccessTimeFromStat\fR(\fIstatPtr\fR)
 .sp
@@ -185,7 +182,6 @@ Tcl_WideUInt
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetUserIdFromStat\fR(\fIstatPtr\fR)
-.VE 8.6
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_GlobTypeData **srcPathPtr out
 .AP "const Tcl_Filesystem" *fsPtr in
@@ -418,7 +414,7 @@ caller (with a reference count of 0).
 the encoding identified by \fIencodingName\fR and evaluates
 its contents as a Tcl script. It returns the same information as
 \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR.
-If \fIencodingName\fR is NULL, the system encoding is used for
+If \fIencodingName\fR is NULL, the utf-8 encoding is used for
 reading the file contents.
 If the file could not be read then a Tcl error is returned to describe
 why the file could not be read.
@@ -434,7 +430,7 @@ or
 which will be safely substituted by the Tcl interpreter into
 .QW ^Z .
 \fBTcl_FSEvalFile\fR is a simpler version of
-\fBTcl_FSEvalFileEx\fR that always uses the system encoding
+\fBTcl_FSEvalFileEx\fR that always uses the utf-8 encoding
 when reading the file.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSLoadFile\fR dynamically loads a binary code file into memory and
@@ -444,20 +440,16 @@ belongs will be called. If that filesystem does not implement this
 function (most virtual filesystems will not, because of OS limitations
 in dynamically loading binary code), Tcl will attempt to copy the file
 to a temporary directory and load that temporary file.
-.VS 8.6
 \fBTcl_FSUnloadFile\fR reverses the operation, asking for the library
 indicated by the \fIloadHandle\fR to be removed from the process. Note that,
 unlike with the \fBunload\fR command, this does not give the library any
 opportunity to clean up.
-.VE 8.6
 .PP
 Both the above functions return a standard Tcl completion code. If an error
 occurs, an error message is left in the \fIinterp\fR's result.
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 The token provided via the variable indicated by \fIloadHandlePtr\fR may be
 used with \fBTcl_FindSymbol\fR.
-.VE 8.6
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR is used by the globbing code to search a
 directory for all files which match a given pattern. The appropriate
@@ -795,7 +787,6 @@ may be deallocated by being passed to \fBckfree\fR). This allows extensions to
 invoke \fBTcl_FSStat\fR and \fBTcl_FSLstat\fR without being dependent on the
 size of the buffer. That in turn depends on the flags used to build Tcl.
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 The portable fields of a \fITcl_StatBuf\fR may be read using the following
 functions, each of which returns the value of the corresponding field listed
 in the table below. Note that on some platforms there may be other fields in
@@ -819,7 +810,6 @@ for a full description of these fields.
 \fBTcl_GetBlocksFromStat\fR	 st_blocks
 \fBTcl_GetBlockSizeFromStat\fR	 st_blksize
 .DE
-.VE 8.6
 .SH "THE VIRTUAL FILESYSTEM API"
 .PP
 A filesystem provides a \fBTcl_Filesystem\fR structure that contains
@@ -1350,11 +1340,11 @@ is considered to be owned by the filesystem (not by Tcl's core), but
 should be given a reference count for Tcl. Tcl will use the contents of the
 list and then decrement that reference count. This allows filesystems to
 choose whether they actually want to retain a
-.QW "master list"
+.QW "global list"
 of volumes
 or not (if not, they generate the list on the fly and pass it to Tcl
 with a reference count of 1 and then forget about the list, if yes, then
-they simply increment the reference count of their master list and pass it
+they simply increment the reference count of their global list and pass it
 to Tcl which will copy the contents and then decrement the count back
 to where it was).
 .PP
@@ -58,6 +58,8 @@ internal full path name of the executable file as computed by
 equivalent to the \fBinfo nameofexecutable\fR command.  NULL
 is returned if the internal full path name has not been
 computed or unknown.
-
+.PP
+\fBTcl_FindExecutable\fR can not be used in stub-enabled extensions. Its symbol
+entry in the stub table is deprecated and it will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 binary, executable file
@@ -27,19 +27,22 @@ Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL, then no message is
 provided on errors.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
 The string value of this value is used to search through \fItablePtr\fR.
-The internal representation is modified to hold the index of the matching
+If the \fBTCL_INDEX_TEMP_TABLE\fR flag is not specified,
+the internal representation is modified to hold the index of the matching
 table entry.
 .AP "const char *const" *tablePtr in
 An array of null-terminated strings.  The end of the array is marked
 by a NULL string pointer.
-Note that references to the \fItablePtr\fR may be retained in the
+Note that, unless the \fBTCL_INDEX_TEMP_TABLE\fR flag is specified,
+references to the \fItablePtr\fR may be retained in the
 internal representation of \fIobjPtr\fR, so this should represent the
 address of a statically-allocated array.
 .AP "const void" *structTablePtr in
 An array of arbitrary type, typically some \fBstruct\fR type.
 The first member of the structure must be a null-terminated string.
 The size of the structure is given by \fIoffset\fR.
-Note that references to the \fIstructTablePtr\fR may be retained in the
+Note that, unless the \fBTCL_INDEX_TEMP_TABLE\fR flag is specified,
+references to the \fIstructTablePtr\fR may be retained in the
 internal representation of \fIobjPtr\fR, so this should represent the
 address of a statically-allocated array of structures.
 .AP int offset in
@@ -50,7 +53,8 @@ Null-terminated string describing what is being looked up, such as
 \fBoption\fR.  This string is included in error messages.
 .AP int flags in
 OR-ed combination of bits providing additional information for
-operation.  The only bit that is currently defined is \fBTCL_EXACT\fR.
+operation.  The only bits that are currently defined are \fBTCL_EXACT\fR
+and \fBTCL_INDEX_TEMP_TABLE\fR.
 .AP int *indexPtr out
 The index of the string in \fItablePtr\fR that matches the value of
 \fIobjPtr\fR is returned here.
@@ -76,7 +80,8 @@ error message to indicate what was being looked up.  For example,
 if \fImsg\fR is \fBoption\fR the error message will have a form like
 .QW "\fBbad option \N'34'firt\N'34': must be first, second, or third\fR" .
 .PP
-If \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR completes successfully it modifies the
+If the \fBTCL_INDEX_TEMP_TABLE\fR was not specified, when
+\fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR completes successfully it modifies the
 internal representation of \fIobjPtr\fR to hold the address of
 the table and the index of the matching entry.  If \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR
 is invoked again with the same \fIobjPtr\fR and \fItablePtr\fR
@@ -84,7 +89,9 @@ arguments (e.g. during a reinvocation of a Tcl command), it returns
 the matching index immediately without having to redo the lookup
 operation.  Note: \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR assumes that the entries
 in \fItablePtr\fR are static: they must not change between
-invocations.  If the value of \fIobjPtr\fR is the empty string,
+invocations.  This caching mechanism can be disallowed by specifying
+the \fBTCL_INDEX_TEMP_TABLE\fR flag.
+If the value of \fIobjPtr\fR is the empty string,
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR will treat it as a non-matching value
 and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
 .PP
@@ -57,6 +57,9 @@ after the optional white space and sign are
 .QW \fB0x\fR
 then \fIsrc\fR is expected to be in hexadecimal form;  otherwise,
 if the first such characters are
+.QW \fB0d\fR
+then \fIsrc\fR is expected to be in decimal form; otherwise,
+if the first such characters are
 .QW \fB0o\fR
 then \fIsrc\fR is expected to be in octal form;  otherwise,
 if the first such characters are
@@ -65,8 +68,8 @@ then \fIsrc\fR is expected to be in binary form;  otherwise,
 if the first such character is
 .QW \fB0\fR
 then \fIsrc\fR
-is expected to be in octal form;  otherwise, \fIsrc\fR is
-expected to be in decimal form.
+is expected to be in octal form;  otherwise, \fIsrc\fR
+is expected to be in decimal form.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetDouble\fR expects \fIsrc\fR to consist of a floating-point
 number, which is:  white space;  a sign; a sequence of digits;  a
@@ -281,7 +281,7 @@ The \fIhashKeyProc\fR member contains the address of a function called to
 calculate a hash value for the key.
 .PP
 .CS
-typedef unsigned int \fBTcl_HashKeyProc\fR(
+typedef TCL_HASH_TYPE \fBTcl_HashKeyProc\fR(
        Tcl_HashTable *\fItablePtr\fR,
        void *\fIkeyPtr\fR);
 .CE
@@ -23,11 +23,11 @@ Tcl interpreter handle.
 A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers
 separated by dots.
 .AP int exact in
-Non-zero means that only the particular version specified by
+1 means that only the particular version specified by
 \fIversion\fR is acceptable.
-Zero means that versions newer than \fIversion\fR are also
+0 means that versions newer than \fIversion\fR are also
 acceptable as long as they have the same major version number
-as \fIversion\fR.
+as \fIversion\fR. Other bits have no effect.
 .BE
 .SH INTRODUCTION
 .PP
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Tcl Core Team
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_InitSubsystems 3 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_InitSubsystems \- initialize the Tcl library.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_InitSubsystems\fR(\fIvoid\fR)
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_InitSubsystems\fR procedure initializes the Tcl
+library. This procedure is typically invoked as the very
+first thing in the application's main program.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_InitSubsystems\fR is very similar in use to
+\fBTcl_FindExecutable\fR. It can be used when Tcl is
+used as utility library, no other encodings than utf8,
+iso8859-1 or unicode are used, and no interest exists in the
+value of \fBinfo nameofexecutable\fR. The system encoding will not
+be extracted from the environment, but falls back to iso8859-1.
+.SH KEYWORDS
+binary, executable file
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_NewIntObj, Tcl_NewLongObj, Tcl_NewWideIntObj, Tcl_SetIntObj, Tcl_SetLongObj, Tcl_SetWideIntObj, Tcl_GetIntFromObj, Tcl_GetLongFromObj, Tcl_GetWideIntFromObj, Tcl_NewBignumObj, Tcl_SetBignumObj, Tcl_GetBignumFromObj, Tcl_TakeBignumFromObj \- manipulate Tcl values as integers
+Tcl_NewIntObj, Tcl_NewLongObj, Tcl_NewWideIntObj, Tcl_SetIntObj, Tcl_SetLongObj, Tcl_SetWideIntObj, Tcl_GetIntFromObj, Tcl_GetIntForIndex, Tcl_GetLongFromObj, Tcl_GetWideIntFromObj, Tcl_NewBignumObj, Tcl_SetBignumObj, Tcl_GetBignumFromObj, Tcl_TakeBignumFromObj \- manipulate Tcl values as integers
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -32,6 +32,9 @@ int
 \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, intPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
+\fBTcl_GetIntForIndex\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, endValue, intPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
 \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, longPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
@@ -55,6 +58,8 @@ int
 \fBTcl_InitBignumFromDouble\fR(\fIinterp, doubleValue, bigValue\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_WideInt doubleValue in/out
+.AP int endValue in
+\fBTcl_GetIntForIndex\fR will return this when the input value is "end".
 .AP int intValue in
 Integer value used to initialize or set a Tcl value.
 .AP long longValue in
@@ -97,7 +102,7 @@ are provided by the C language standard.  The \fBTcl_WideInt\fR type is a
 typedef defined to be whatever signed integral type covers at least the
 64-bit integer range (-9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807).  Depending
 on the platform and the C compiler, the actual type might be
-\fBlong int\fR, \fBlong long int\fR, \fB__int64\fR, or something else.
+\fBlong long int\fR, \fB__int64\fR, or something else.
 The \fBmp_int\fR type is a multiple-precision integer type defined
 by the LibTomMath multiple-precision integer library.
 .PP
@@ -115,6 +120,16 @@ violates Tcl's copy-on-write policy.  Any existing string representation
 or internal representation in the unshared Tcl value will be freed
 as a consequence of setting the new value.
 .PP
+The \fBTcl_GetIntForIndex\fR routine attempts to retrieve an index
+value from the Tcl value \fIobjPtr\fR.  If the attempt succeeds,
+then \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned, and the value is written to the
+storage provided by the caller.  The attempt might fail if
+\fIobjPtr\fR does not hold an index value.  If the attempt fails,
+then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and if \fIinterp\fR is non-NULL,
+an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR.  The \fBTcl_ObjType\fR
+of \fIobjPtr\fR may be changed to make subsequent calls to the
+same routine more efficient.
+.PP
 The \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR,
 \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetBignumFromObj\fR, and
 \fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR routines attempt to retrieve an integral
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.TH Tcl_Interp 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_Interp 3 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
@@ -15,9 +15,9 @@ Tcl_Interp \- client-visible fields of interpreter structures
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 typedef struct {
-    char *\fIresult\fR;
-    Tcl_FreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
-    int \fIerrorLine\fR;
+    char *\fIresult\fR;			/* NO LONGER AVAILABLE */
+    Tcl_FreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;	/* NO LONGER AVAILABLE */
+    int \fIerrorLine\fR;		/* NO LONGER AVAILABLE */
 } \fBTcl_Interp\fR;

 typedef void \fBTcl_FreeProc\fR(
@@ -25,110 +25,17 @@ typedef void \fBTcl_FreeProc\fR(
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-The \fBTcl_CreateInterp\fR procedure returns a pointer to a Tcl_Interp
+The \fBTcl_CreateInterp\fR procedure returns a pointer to a \fBTcl_Interp\fR
 structure.  Callers of \fBTcl_CreateInterp\fR should use this pointer
 as an opaque token, suitable for nothing other than passing back to
-other routines in the Tcl interface.  Accessing fields directly through
-the pointer as described below is no longer supported.  The supported
-public routines \fBTcl_SetResult\fR, \fBTcl_GetResult\fR,
-\fBTcl_SetErrorLine\fR, \fBTcl_GetErrorLine\fR must be used instead.
+other routines in the Tcl interface from the same thread that called
+\fBTcl_CreateInterp\fR.  The \fBTcl_Interp\fR struct no longer has any
+supported client-visible fields.  Supported public routines such as
+\fBTcl_SetResult\fR, \fBTcl_GetResult\fR, \fBTcl_SetErrorLine\fR,
+\fBTcl_GetErrorLine\fR must be used instead.
 .PP
-For legacy programs and extensions no longer being maintained, compiles
-against the Tcl 8.6 header files are only possible with the compiler
-directives
-.CS
-#define USE_INTERP_RESULT
-.CE
-and/or
-.CS
-#define USE_INTERP_ERRORLINE
-.CE
-depending on which fields of the \fBTcl_Interp\fR struct are accessed.
-These directives may be embedded in code or supplied via compiler options.
-.PP
-The \fIresult\fR and \fIfreeProc\fR fields are used to return
-results or error messages from commands.
-This information is returned by command procedures back to \fBTcl_Eval\fR,
-and by \fBTcl_Eval\fR back to its callers.
-The \fIresult\fR field points to the string that represents the
-result or error message, and the \fIfreeProc\fR field tells how
-to dispose of the storage for the string when it is not needed anymore.
-The easiest way for command procedures to manipulate these
-fields is to call procedures like \fBTcl_SetResult\fR
-or \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR;  they
-will hide all the details of managing the fields.
-The description below is for those procedures that manipulate the
-fields directly.
-.PP
-Whenever a command procedure returns, it must ensure
-that the \fIresult\fR field of its interpreter points to the string
-being returned by the command.
-The \fIresult\fR field must always point to a valid string.
-If a command wishes to return no result then \fIinterp->result\fR
-should point to an empty string.
-Normally, results are assumed to be statically allocated,
-which means that the contents will not change before the next time
-\fBTcl_Eval\fR is called or some other command procedure is invoked.
-In this case, the \fIfreeProc\fR field must be zero.
-Alternatively, a command procedure may dynamically
-allocate its return value (e.g. using \fBTcl_Alloc\fR)
-and store a pointer to it in \fIinterp->result\fR.
-In this case, the command procedure must also set \fIinterp->freeProc\fR
-to the address of a procedure that can free the value, or \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR
-if the storage was allocated directly by Tcl or by a call to
-\fBTcl_Alloc\fR.
-If \fIinterp->freeProc\fR is non-zero, then Tcl will call \fIfreeProc\fR
-to free the space pointed to by \fIinterp->result\fR before it
-invokes the next command.
-If a client procedure overwrites \fIinterp->result\fR when
-\fIinterp->freeProc\fR is non-zero, then it is responsible for calling
-\fIfreeProc\fR to free the old \fIinterp->result\fR (the \fBTcl_FreeResult\fR
-macro should be used for this purpose).
-.PP
-\fIFreeProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
-\fBTcl_FreeProc\fR declaration above:  it receives a single
-argument which is a pointer to the result value to free.
-In most applications \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR is the only non-zero value ever
-used for \fIfreeProc\fR.
-However, an application may store a different procedure address
-in \fIfreeProc\fR in order to use an alternate memory allocator
-or in order to do other cleanup when the result memory is freed.
-.PP
-As part of processing each command, \fBTcl_Eval\fR initializes
-\fIinterp->result\fR
-and \fIinterp->freeProc\fR just before calling the command procedure for
-the command.  The \fIfreeProc\fR field will be initialized to zero,
-and \fIinterp->result\fR will point to an empty string.  Commands that
-do not return any value can simply leave the fields alone.
-Furthermore, the empty string pointed to by \fIresult\fR is actually
-part of an array of \fBTCL_RESULT_SIZE\fR characters (approximately 200).
-If a command wishes to return a short string, it can simply copy
-it to the area pointed to by \fIinterp->result\fR.  Or, it can use
-the sprintf procedure to generate a short result string at the location
-pointed to by \fIinterp->result\fR.
-.PP
-It is a general convention in Tcl-based applications that the result
-of an interpreter is normally in the initialized state described
-in the previous paragraph.
-Procedures that manipulate an interpreter's result (e.g. by
-returning an error) will generally assume that the result
-has been initialized when the procedure is called.
-If such a procedure is to be called after the result has been
-changed, then \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR should be called first to
-reset the result to its initialized state.  The direct use of
-\fIinterp->result\fR is strongly deprecated (see \fBTcl_SetResult\fR).
-.PP
-The \fIerrorLine\fR
-field is valid only after \fBTcl_Eval\fR returns
-a \fBTCL_ERROR\fR return code.  In this situation the \fIerrorLine\fR
-field identifies the line number of the command being executed when
-the error occurred.  The line numbers are relative to the command
-being executed:  1 means the first line of the command passed to
-\fBTcl_Eval\fR, 2 means the second line, and so on.
-The \fIerrorLine\fR field is typically used in conjunction with
-\fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR to report information about where an error
-occurred.
-\fIErrorLine\fR should not normally be modified except by \fBTcl_Eval\fR.
+Any legacy programs and extensions trying to access the fields above
+in their source code will need conversion to compile for Tcl 8.7 and later.

 .SH KEYWORDS
-free, initialized, interpreter, malloc, result
+interpreter, result
@@ -116,7 +116,7 @@ execution of the callbacks is unspecified) execution in the limited
 interpreter is stopped by raising an error and setting a flag that
 prevents the \fBcatch\fR command in that interpreter from trapping
 that error.  It is up to the context that started execution in that
-interpreter (typically a master interpreter) to handle the error.
+interpreter (typically the main interpreter) to handle the error.
 .SH "LIMIT CHECKING API"
 .PP
 To check the resource limits for an interpreter, call
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_LinkVar, Tcl_UnlinkVar, Tcl_UpdateLinkedVar \- link Tcl variable to C variable
+Tcl_LinkArray, Tcl_LinkVar, Tcl_UnlinkVar, Tcl_UpdateLinkedVar \- link Tcl variable to C variable
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -17,27 +17,52 @@ Tcl_LinkVar, Tcl_UnlinkVar, Tcl_UpdateLinkedVar \- link Tcl variable to C variab
 int
 \fBTcl_LinkVar\fR(\fIinterp, varName, addr, type\fR)
 .sp
+.VS "TIP 312"
+int
+\fBTcl_LinkArray\fR(\fIinterp, varName, addr, type, size\fR)
+.VE "TIP 312"
+.sp
 \fBTcl_UnlinkVar\fR(\fIinterp, varName\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_UpdateLinkedVar\fR(\fIinterp, varName\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp writable
+.AS Tcl_Interp varName in
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter that contains \fIvarName\fR.
 Also used by \fBTcl_LinkVar\fR to return error messages.
 .AP "const char" *varName in
 Name of global variable.
-.AP char *addr in
+.AP void *addr in
 Address of C variable that is to be linked to \fIvarName\fR.
+.sp
+.VS "TIP 312"
+In \fBTcl_LinkArray\fR, may be NULL to tell Tcl to create the storage
+for the array in the variable.
+.VE "TIP 312"
 .AP int type in
-Type of C variable.  Must be one of \fBTCL_LINK_INT\fR,
+Type of C variable for \fBTcl_LinkVar\fR or type of array element for
+\fBTcl_LinkArray\fR.  Must be one of \fBTCL_LINK_INT\fR,
 \fBTCL_LINK_UINT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_CHAR\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_UCHAR\fR,
 \fBTCL_LINK_SHORT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_USHORT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_LONG\fR,
 \fBTCL_LINK_ULONG\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_INT\fR,
-\fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_UINT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_FLOAT\fR,
-\fBTCL_LINK_DOUBLE\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_BOOLEAN\fR, or
-\fBTCL_LINK_STRING\fR, optionally OR'ed with \fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR
-to make Tcl variable read-only.
+\fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_UINT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_FLOAT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_DOUBLE\fR,
+\fBTCL_LINK_BOOLEAN\fR, or one of the extra ones listed below.
+.sp
+In \fBTcl_LinkVar\fR, the additional linked type \fBTCL_LINK_STRING\fR may be
+used.
+.sp
+.VS "TIP 312"
+In \fBTcl_LinkArray\fR, the additional linked types \fBTCL_LINK_CHARS\fR and
+\fBTCL_LINK_BYTES\fR may be used.
+.VE "TIP 312"
+.sp
+All the above for both functions may be
+optionally OR'ed with \fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR to make the Tcl
+variable read-only.
+.AP int size in
+.VS "TIP 312"
+The number of elements in the C array. Must be greater than zero.
+.VE "TIP 312"
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
@@ -52,130 +77,179 @@ while setting up the link (e.g. because \fIvarName\fR is the
 name of array) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and the interpreter's result
 contains an error message.
 .PP
+.VS "TIP 312"
+\fBTcl_LinkArray\fR is similar, but for arrays of fixed size (given by
+the \fIsize\fR argument). When asked to allocate the backing C array
+storage (via the \fIaddr\fR argument being NULL), it writes the
+address that it allocated to the Tcl interpreter result.
+.VE "TIP 312"
+.PP
 The \fItype\fR argument specifies the type of the C variable,
+or the type of the elements of the C array,
 and must have one of the following values, optionally OR'ed with
 \fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR:
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_INT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBint\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBint\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR;  attempts to write
 non-integer values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors. Incomplete integer representations (like the empty
-string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted
+string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted
 as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_UINT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBunsigned int\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBunsigned int\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
 integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR and in the
 platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned int\fR type; attempts to
 write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
 \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete integer
-representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary
+representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary
 prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_CHAR\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBchar\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBchar\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and be in the range of the
 \fBchar\fR datatype; attempts to write non-integer or out-of-range
 values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete
 integer representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the
-hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
+hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS "TIP 312"
+If using an array of these, consider using \fBTCL_LINK_CHARS\fR instead.
+.VE "TIP 312"
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_CHARS\fR
+.VS "TIP 312"
+The C array is of type \fBchar *\fR and is mapped into Tcl as a string.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have the same length as
+the underlying storage. Only supported with \fBTcl_LinkArray\fR.
+.VE "TIP 312"
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_UCHAR\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBunsigned char\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBunsigned char\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
 integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and in the
 platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned char\fR type; attempts to
 write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
 \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete integer
-representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary
+representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary
 prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS "TIP 312"
+If using an array of these, consider using \fBTCL_LINK_BYTES\fR instead.
+.VE "TIP 312"
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_BYTES\fR
+.VS "TIP 312"
+The C array is of type \fBunsigned char *\fR and is mapped into Tcl
+as a bytearray.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have the same length as
+the underlying storage. Only supported with \fBTcl_LinkArray\fR.
+.VE "TIP 312"
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_SHORT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBshort\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBshort\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and be in the range of the
 \fBshort\fR datatype; attempts to write non-integer or out-of-range
 values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete
 integer representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the
-hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
+hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_USHORT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBunsigned short\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBunsigned short\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
 integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and in the
 platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned short\fR type; attempts to
 write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
 \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete integer
-representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary
+representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary
 prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_LONG\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBlong\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBlong\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR; attempts to write
 non-integer or out-of-range
 values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete
 integer representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the
-hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
+hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_ULONG\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBunsigned long\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBunsigned long\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
 integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR and in the
 platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned long\fR type; attempts to
 write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
 \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete integer
-representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary
+representations (like the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary
 prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_DOUBLE\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBdouble\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBdouble\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper real
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR;  attempts to write
 non-real values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors. Incomplete integer or real representations (like the
-empty string, '.', '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary prefix) are
+empty string, '.', '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are
 accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_FLOAT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBfloat\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBfloat\fR.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper real
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR and must be within the
 range acceptable for a \fBfloat\fR; attempts to
 write non-real values (or values outside the range) into
 \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete integer
 or real representations (like the empty string, '.', '+', '-' or
-the hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
+the hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_INT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBTcl_WideInt\fR (which is an integer type
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBTcl_WideInt\fR
+(which is an integer type
 at least 64-bits wide on all platforms that can support it.)
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR;  attempts to write
 non-integer values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors. Incomplete integer representations (like the empty
-string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted
+string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted
 as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_UINT\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBTcl_WideUInt\fR (which is an unsigned
-integer type at least 64-bits wide on all platforms that can support
-it.)
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBTcl_WideUInt\fR
+(which is an unsigned integer type at least 64-bits wide on all platforms that
+can support it.)
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
 integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR (it will be
 cast to unsigned);
 .\" FIXME! Use bignums instead.
 attempts to write non-integer values into \fIvarName\fR will be
 rejected with Tcl errors. Incomplete integer representations (like
-the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/binary prefix) are accepted
+the empty string, '+', '-' or the hex/octal/decimal/binary prefix) are accepted
 as if they are valid too.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_BOOLEAN\fR
-The C variable is of type \fBint\fR.
+.
+The C variable, or each element of the C array, is of type \fBint\fR.
 If its value is zero then it will read from Tcl as
 .QW 0 ;
 otherwise it will read from Tcl as
@@ -188,6 +262,7 @@ non-boolean values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_STRING\fR
+.
 The C variable is of type \fBchar *\fR.
 If its value is not NULL then it must be a pointer to a string
 allocated with \fBTcl_Alloc\fR or \fBckalloc\fR.
@@ -197,6 +272,7 @@ new value.
 If the C variable contains a NULL pointer then the Tcl variable
 will read as
 .QW NULL .
+This is only supported by \fBTcl_LinkVar\fR.
 .PP
 If the \fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR flag is present in \fItype\fR then the
 variable will be read-only from Tcl, so that its value can only be
@@ -9,18 +9,18 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_ClassSetConstructor, Tcl_ClassSetDestructor, Tcl_MethodDeclarerClass, Tcl_MethodDeclarerObject, Tcl_MethodIsPublic, Tcl_MethodIsType, Tcl_MethodName, Tcl_NewInstanceMethod, Tcl_NewMethod, Tcl_ObjectContextInvokeNext, Tcl_ObjectContextIsFiltering, Tcl_ObjectContextMethod, Tcl_ObjectContextObject, Tcl_ObjectContextSkippedArgs \- manipulate methods and method-call contexts
+Tcl_ClassSetConstructor, Tcl_ClassSetDestructor, Tcl_MethodDeclarerClass, Tcl_MethodDeclarerObject, Tcl_MethodIsPublic, Tcl_MethodIsPrivate, Tcl_MethodIsType, Tcl_MethodName, Tcl_NewInstanceMethod, Tcl_NewMethod, Tcl_ObjectContextInvokeNext, Tcl_ObjectContextIsFiltering, Tcl_ObjectContextMethod, Tcl_ObjectContextObject, Tcl_ObjectContextSkippedArgs \- manipulate methods and method-call contexts
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tclOO.h>\fR
 .sp
 Tcl_Method
-\fBTcl_NewMethod\fR(\fIinterp, class, nameObj, isPublic,
-              methodTypePtr, clientData\fR)
+\fBTcl_NewMethod\fR(\fIinterp, class, nameObj, flags, methodTypePtr,
+              clientData\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Method
-\fBTcl_NewInstanceMethod\fR(\fIinterp, object, nameObj, isPublic,
-                      methodTypePtr, clientData\fR)
+\fBTcl_NewInstanceMethod\fR(\fIinterp, object, nameObj, flags, methodTypePtr,
+                      clientData\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_ClassSetConstructor\fR(\fIinterp, class, method\fR)
 .sp
@@ -35,8 +35,13 @@ Tcl_Object
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_MethodName\fR(\fImethod\fR)
 .sp
+.VS TIP500
 int
 \fBTcl_MethodIsPublic\fR(\fImethod\fR)
+.VE TIP500
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_MethodIsPrivate\fR(\fImethod\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_MethodIsType\fR(\fImethod, methodTypePtr, clientDataPtr\fR)
@@ -66,10 +71,15 @@ The class to create the method in.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *nameObj in
 The name of the method to create. Should not be NULL unless creating
 constructors or destructors.
-.AP int isPublic in
-A flag saying what the visibility of the method is. The only supported public
-values of this flag are 0 for a non-exported method, and 1 for an exported
-method.
+.AP int flags in
+A flag saying (currently) what the visibility of the method is. The supported
+public values of this flag are \fBTCL_OO_METHOD_PUBLIC\fR (which is fixed at 1
+for backward compatibility) for an exported method,
+\fBTCL_OO_METHOD_UNEXPORTED\fR (which is fixed at 0 for backward
+compatibility) for a non-exported method,
+.VS TIP500
+and \fBTCL_OO_METHOD_PRIVATE\fR for a private method.
+.VE TIP500
 .AP Tcl_MethodType *methodTypePtr in
 A description of the type of the method to create, or the type of method to
 compare against.
@@ -105,8 +115,12 @@ Given a method, the entity that declared it can be found using
 attached to (or NULL if the method is not attached to any class) and
 \fBTcl_MethodDeclarerObject\fR which returns the object that the method is
 attached to (or NULL if the method is not attached to an object). The name of
-the method can be retrieved with \fBTcl_MethodName\fR and whether the method
-is exported is retrieved with \fBTcl_MethodIsPublic\fR. The type of the method
+the method can be retrieved with \fBTcl_MethodName\fR, whether the method
+is exported is retrieved with \fBTcl_MethodIsPublic\fR,
+.VS TIP500
+and whether the method is private is retrieved with \fBTcl_MethodIsPrivate\fR.
+.VE TIP500
+The type of the method
 can also be introspected upon to a limited degree; the function
 \fBTcl_MethodIsType\fR returns whether a method is of a particular type,
 assigning the per-method \fIclientData\fR to the variable pointed to by
@@ -117,8 +131,12 @@ Methods are created by \fBTcl_NewMethod\fR and \fBTcl_NewInstanceMethod\fR,
 which
 create a method attached to a class or an object respectively. In both cases,
 the \fInameObj\fR argument gives the name of the method to create, the
-\fIisPublic\fR argument states whether the method should be exported
-initially, the \fImethodTypePtr\fR argument describes the implementation of
+\fIflags\fR argument states whether the method should be exported
+initially
+.VS TIP500
+or be marked as a private method,
+.VE TIP500
+the \fImethodTypePtr\fR argument describes the implementation of
 the method (see the \fBMETHOD TYPES\fR section below) and the \fIclientData\fR
 argument gives some implementation-specific data that is passed on to the
 implementation of the method when it is called.
@@ -132,22 +132,17 @@ higher-level software that they have occurred.  The procedures
 and \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR, \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR, and
 \fBTcl_DeleteEvents\fR are used primarily by event sources.
 .IP [2]
-The event queue: for non-threaded applications,
-there is a single queue for the whole application,
-containing events that have been detected but not yet serviced.  Event
-sources place events onto the queue so that they may be processed in
-order at appropriate times during the event loop. The event queue
-guarantees a fair discipline of event handling, so that no event
-source can starve the others.  It also allows events to be saved for
-servicing at a future time.  Threaded applications work in a
-similar manner, except that there is a separate event queue for
-each thread containing a Tcl interpreter.
+The event queue: there is a single queue for each thread containing
+a Tcl interpreter, containing events that have been detected but not
+yet serviced.  Event sources place events onto the queue so that they
+may be processed in order at appropriate times during the event loop.
+The event queue guarantees a fair discipline of event handling, so that
+no event source can starve the others.  It also allows events to be
+saved for servicing at a future time.
 \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR is used (primarily
-by event sources) to add events to the event queue and
+by event sources) to add events to the current thread's event queue and
 \fBTcl_DeleteEvents\fR is used to remove events from the queue without
-processing them.  In a threaded application, \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR adds
-an event to the current thread's queue, and \fBTcl_ThreadQueueEvent\fR
-adds an event to a queue in a specific thread.
+processing them.
 .IP [3]
 The event loop: in order to detect and process events, the application
 enters a loop that waits for events to occur, places them on the event
@@ -403,11 +398,7 @@ the event source (using \fBTcl_Alloc\fR or the Tcl macro \fBckalloc\fR)
 before calling \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR, but it
 will be freed by \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR, not by the event source.
 .PP
-Threaded applications work in a
-similar manner, except that there is a separate event queue for
-each thread containing a Tcl interpreter.
-Calling \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR in a multithreaded application adds
-an event to the current thread's queue.
+Calling \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR adds an event to the current thread's queue.
 To add an event to another thread's queue, use \fBTcl_ThreadQueueEvent\fR.
 \fBTcl_ThreadQueueEvent\fR accepts as an argument a Tcl_ThreadId argument,
 which uniquely identifies a thread in a Tcl application.  To obtain the
@@ -498,8 +489,7 @@ under Unix it happens when \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR would have waited
 forever because there were no active event sources and the timeout was
 infinite.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR is used in multithreaded applications to allow
-any thread to
+\fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR is used to allow any thread to
 .QW "wake up"
 the notifier to alert it to new events on its
 queue.  \fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR requires as an argument the notifier
@@ -4,12 +4,12 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.TH Tcl_OpenTcpClient 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_OpenTcpClient 3 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_OpenTcpClient, Tcl_MakeTcpClientChannel, Tcl_OpenTcpServer \- procedures to open channels using TCP sockets
+Tcl_OpenTcpClient, Tcl_MakeTcpClientChannel, Tcl_OpenTcpServer, Tcl_OpenTcpServerEx \- procedures to open channels using TCP sockets
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h> \fR
@@ -23,6 +23,9 @@ Tcl_Channel
 Tcl_Channel
 \fBTcl_OpenTcpServer\fR(\fIinterp, port, myaddr, proc, clientData\fR)
 .sp
+Tcl_Channel
+\fBTcl_OpenTcpServerEx\fR(\fIinterp, service, myaddr, flags, proc, clientData\fR)
+.sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_TcpAcceptProc clientData
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
@@ -30,6 +33,9 @@ Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting.  If non-NULL and an
 error occurs, an error message is left in the interpreter's result.
 .AP int port in
 A port number to connect to as a client or to listen on as a server.
+.AP "const char" *service in
+A string specifying the port number to connect to as a client or to listen on as
+ a server.
 .AP "const char" *host in
 A string specifying a host name or address for the remote end of the connection.
 .AP int myport in
@@ -41,6 +47,9 @@ for the local end of the connection.  If NULL, a default interface is
 chosen.
 .AP int async in
 If nonzero, the client socket is connected asynchronously to the server.
+.AP "unsigned int" flags in
+ORed combination of \fBTCL_TCPSERVER\fR flags that specify additional
+informations about the socket being created.
 .AP ClientData sock in
 Platform-specific handle for client TCP socket.
 .AP Tcl_TcpAcceptProc *proc in
@@ -158,6 +167,11 @@ register it, use \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR.
 If one of the standard channels, \fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR was
 previously closed, the act of creating the new channel also assigns it as a
 replacement for the standard channel.
+.SS TCL_OPENTCPSERVEREX
+.PP
+\fBTcl_OpenTcpServerEx\fR behaviour is identical to \fBTcl_OpenTcpServer\fR but
+gives more flexibility to the user by providing a mean to further customize some
+aspects of the socket via the \fIflags\fR parameter.
 .SH "PLATFORM ISSUES"
 .PP
 On Unix platforms, the socket handle is a Unix file descriptor as
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 .BS
 '\"  Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_Panic, Tcl_PanicVA, Tcl_SetPanicProc \- report fatal error and abort
+Tcl_Panic, Tcl_PanicVA, Tcl_SetPanicProc, Tcl_ConsolePanic \- report fatal error and abort
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -21,6 +21,9 @@ void
 void
 \fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR(\fIpanicProc\fR)
 .sp
+void
+\fBTcl_ConsolePanic\fR(\fIformat\fR, \fIarg\fR, \fIarg\fR, \fI...\fR)
+.sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_PanicProc *panicProc
 .AP "const char*" format in
@@ -54,6 +57,14 @@ message is sent to the debugger instead. If the windows executable
 does not have a stderr channel (e.g. \fBwish.exe\fR), then a
 system dialog box is used to display the panic message.
 .PP
+If your application doesn't use \fBTcl_Main\fR or \fBTk_Main\fR
+and you want to implicitly use the stderr channel of your
+application's C runtime (instead of the stderr channel of the
+C runtime used by Tcl), you can call \fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR
+with \fBTcl_ConsolePanic\fR as its argument. On platforms which
+only have one C runtime (almost all platforms except Windows)
+\fBTcl_ConsolePanic\fR is equivalent to NULL.
+.PP
 \fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR may be used to modify the behavior of
 \fBTcl_Panic\fR.  The \fIpanicProc\fR argument should match the
 type \fBTcl_PanicProc\fR:
@@ -75,6 +86,9 @@ The typical use of \fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR arranges for the error message
 to be displayed or reported in a manner more suitable for the
 application or the platform.
 .PP
+\fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR can not be used in stub-enabled extensions. Its symbol
+entry in the stub table is deprecated and it will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
+.PP
 Although the primary callers of \fBTcl_Panic\fR are the procedures of
 the Tcl library, \fBTcl_Panic\fR is a public function and may be called
 by any extension or application that wishes to abort the process and
@@ -82,7 +96,9 @@ have a panic message displayed the same way that panic messages from Tcl
 will be displayed.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_PanicVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_Panic\fR except that instead of
-taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.
+taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list. Interfaces
+using argument lists have been found to be nonportable in practice. This
+function is deprecated and will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 abort(3), printf(3), exec(n), format(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
@@ -32,8 +32,6 @@ the command at global level instead of the current stack level.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RecordAndEvalObj\fR is invoked to record a command as an event
 on the history list and then execute it using \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR
-(or \fBTcl_GlobalEvalObj\fR if the \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR bit is set
-in \fIflags\fR).
 It returns a completion code such as \fBTCL_OK\fR just like \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR,
 as well as a result value containing additional information
 (a result value or error message)
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
 '\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2004. (not subject to US copyright)
+'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Nathan Coulter.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -9,7 +10,9 @@
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_SaveInterpState, Tcl_RestoreInterpState, Tcl_DiscardInterpState, Tcl_SaveResult, Tcl_RestoreResult, Tcl_DiscardResult \- save and restore an interpreter's state
+Tcl_SaveInterpState, Tcl_RestoreInterpState, Tcl_DiscardInterpState,
+Tcl_SaveResult, Tcl_RestoreResult, Tcl_DiscardResult \- Save and restore the
+state of an an interpreter.
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -30,91 +33,53 @@ int
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_InterpState savedPtr
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter for which state should be saved.
+The interpreter for the operation.
 .AP int status in
-Return code value to save as part of interpreter state.
+The return code for the state.
 .AP Tcl_InterpState state in
-Saved state token to be restored or discarded.
+A token for saved state.
 .AP Tcl_SavedResult *savedPtr in
-Pointer to location where interpreter result should be saved or restored.
+A pointer to storage for saved state.
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-These routines allows a C procedure to take a snapshot of the current
-state of an interpreter so that it can be restored after a call
-to \fBTcl_Eval\fR or some other routine that modifies the interpreter
-state.  There are two triplets of routines meant to work together.
+These routines save the state of an interpreter before a call to a routine such
+as \fBTcl_Eval\fR, and restore the state afterwards.
 .PP
-The first triplet stores the snapshot of interpreter state in
-an opaque token returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR.  That token
-value may then be passed back to one of \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR
-or \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR, depending on whether the interp
-state is to be restored.  So long as one of the latter two routines
-is called, Tcl will take care of memory management.
+\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR saves the parts of \fIinterp\fR that comprise the
+result of a script, including the resulting value, the return code passed as
+\fIstatus\fR, and any options such as \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR.
+It returns a token for the saved state.  The interpreter result is not reset
+and no interpreter state is changed.
 .PP
-The second triplet stores the snapshot of only the interpreter
-result (not its complete state) in memory allocated by the caller.
-These routines are passed a pointer to \fBTcl_SavedResult\fR
-that is used to store enough information to restore the interpreter result.
-\fBTcl_SavedResult\fR can be allocated on the stack of the calling
-procedure.  These routines do not save the state of any error
-information in the interpreter (e.g. the \fB\-errorcode\fR or
-\fB\-errorinfo\fR return options, when an error is in progress).
+\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR restores the state indicated by \fIstate\fR and
+returns the \fIstatus\fR originally passed in the corresponding call to
+\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR.
 .PP
-Because the routines \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR,
-\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR perform
-a superset of the functions provided by the other routines,
-any new code should only make use of the more powerful routines.
-The older, weaker routines \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR,
-and \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR continue to exist only for the sake
-of existing programs that may already be using them.
+If a saved state is not restored, \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR must be called
+to release it.  A token used to discard or restore state must not be used
+again.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR takes a snapshot of those portions of
-interpreter state that make up the full result of script evaluation.
-This include the interpreter result, the return code (passed in
-as the \fIstatus\fR argument, and any return options, including
-\fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR when an error is in progress.
-This snapshot is returned as an opaque token of type \fBTcl_InterpState\fR.
-The call to \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR does not itself change the
-state of the interpreter.  Unlike \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, it does
-not reset the interpreter.
+\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR are
+deprecated.  Instead use \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR,
+\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR, which are more
+capable.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR accepts a \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token
-previously returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR and restores the
-state of the interp to the state held in that snapshot.  The return
-value of \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR is the status value originally
-passed to \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR when the snapshot token was
-created.
+\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR moves the result of \fIinterp\fR to the location
+\fIstatePtr\fR points to and returns the interpreter result to its initial
+state.  It does not save options such as \fB\-errorcode\fR or
+\fB\-errorinfo\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR is called to release a \fBTcl_InterpState\fR
-token previously returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR when that
-snapshot is not to be restored to an interp.
-.PP
-The \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR
-must eventually be passed to either \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR
-or \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR to avoid a memory leak.  Once
-the \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token is passed to one of them, the
-token is no longer valid and should not be used anymore.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR moves the string and value results
-of \fIinterp\fR into the location specified by \fIstatePtr\fR.
-\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR clears the result for \fIinterp\fR and
-leaves the result in its normal empty initialized state.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR moves the string and value results from
-\fIstatePtr\fR back into \fIinterp\fR.  Any result or error that was
-already in the interpreter will be cleared.  The \fIstatePtr\fR is left
-in an uninitialized state and cannot be used until another call to
+\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR clears any existing result or error in \fIinterp\fR and
+moves the result from \fIstatePtr\fR back to \fIinterp\fR.  \fIstatePtr\fR is
+then in an undefined state and must not be used until passed again to
 \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR releases the saved interpreter state
-stored at \fBstatePtr\fR.  The state structure is left in an
-uninitialized state and cannot be used until another call to
+\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR releases the state stored at \fBstatePtr\fR, which is
+then in an undefined state and must not be used until passed again to
 \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR.
 .PP
-Once \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR is called to save the interpreter
-result, either \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR or
-\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR must be called to properly clean up the
-memory associated with the saved state.
+If a saved result is not restored, \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR must be called to
+release it.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 result, state, interp
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.TH Tcl_SetResult 3 8.6 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_SetResult 3 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
@@ -30,9 +30,7 @@ const char *
 .sp
 \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.6
 \fBTcl_TransferResult\fR(\fIsourceInterp, code, targetInterp\fR)
-.VE 8.6
 .sp
 \fBTcl_AppendElement\fR(\fIinterp, element\fR)
 .sp
@@ -57,17 +55,11 @@ Address of procedure to call to release storage at
 An argument list which must have been initialized using
 \fBva_start\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *sourceInterp in
-.VS 8.6
 Interpreter that the result and return options should be transferred from.
-.VE 8.6
 .AP Tcl_Interp *targetInterp in
-.VS 8.6
 Interpreter that the result and return options should be transferred to.
-.VE 8.6
 .AP int code in
-.VS 8.6
 Return code value that controls transfer of return options.
-.VE 8.6
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
@@ -153,8 +145,9 @@ call; the last argument in the list must be a NULL pointer.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AppendResultVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR except that
 instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.
+Interfaces using argument lists have been found to be nonportable in practice.
+This function is deprecated and will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 \fBTcl_TransferResult\fR transfers interpreter state from \fIsourceInterp\fR
 to \fItargetInterp\fR. The two interpreters must have been created in the
 same thread.  If \fIsourceInterp\fR and \fItargetInterp\fR are the same,
@@ -163,7 +156,6 @@ from \fIsourceInterp\fR to \fItargetInterp\fR, and resets the result
 in \fIsourceInterp\fR. It also moves the return options dictionary as
 controlled by the return code value \fIcode\fR in the same manner
 as \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR.
-.VE 8.6
 .SH "DEPRECATED INTERFACES"
 .SS "OLD STRING PROCEDURES"
 .PP
@@ -205,14 +197,9 @@ is about to replace one result value with another.
 It used to be legal for programs to
 directly read and write \fIinterp->result\fR
 to manipulate the interpreter result.  The Tcl headers no longer
-permit this access by default, and C code still doing this must
+permit this access. C code still doing this must
 be updated to use supported routines \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR,
 \fBTcl_GetStringResult\fR, \fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR, and \fBTcl_SetResult\fR.
-As a migration aid, access can be restored with the compiler directive
-.CS
-#define USE_INTERP_RESULT
-.CE
-but this is meant only to offer life support to otherwise dead code.
 .SH "THE TCL_FREEPROC ARGUMENT TO TCL_SETRESULT"
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SetResult\fR's \fIfreeProc\fR argument specifies how
@@ -64,6 +64,9 @@ the event of an error it should set the interpreter's result to point to an
 error message.  The result or error from the initialization procedure will
 be returned as the result of the \fBload\fR command that caused the
 initialization procedure to be invoked.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_StaticPackage\fR can not be used in stub-enabled extensions. Its symbol
+entry in the stub table is deprecated and it will be removed in Tcl 9.0.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 initialization procedure, package, static linking
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ Tcl_UniChar *
 Tcl_UniChar *
 \fBTcl_GetUnicode\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
 .sp
-Tcl_UniChar
+int
 \fBTcl_GetUniChar\fR(\fIobjPtr, index\fR)
 .sp
 int
@@ -204,8 +204,8 @@ where the caller does not need the length of the unicode string
 representation.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetUniChar\fR returns the \fIindex\fR'th character in the
-value's Unicode representation. The index is assumed to be in the
-appropriate range.
+value's Unicode representation. If the index is out of range or
+it references a low surrogate preceded by a high surrogate, it returns -1;
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetRange\fR returns a newly created value comprised of the
 characters between \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR (inclusive) in the
@@ -249,7 +249,9 @@ must be a NULL pointer to indicate the end of the list.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AppendStringsToObjVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_AppendStringsToObj\fR
 except that instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an
-argument list.
+argument list.  Interfaces using argument lists have been found to be
+nonportable in practice. This function is deprecated and will be removed
+in Tcl 9.0.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AppendLimitedToObj\fR is similar to \fBTcl_AppendToObj\fR
 except that it imposes a limit on how many bytes are appended.
@@ -28,10 +28,10 @@ First, the Tcl interpreter breaks the command into \fIwords\fR
 and performs substitutions as described below.
 These substitutions are performed in the same way for all
 commands.
-Secondly, the first word is used to locate a command procedure to
-carry out the command, then all of the words of the command are
-passed to the command procedure.
-The command procedure is free to interpret each of its words
+Secondly, the first word is used to locate a routine to
+carry out the command, and the remaining words of the command are
+passed to that routine.
+The routine is free to interpret each of its words
 in any way it likes, such as an integer, variable name, list,
 or Tcl script.
 Different commands interpret their words differently.
@@ -223,7 +223,10 @@ before this range overflows, or when the maximum of eight digits
 is reached.  The upper bits of the Unicode character will be 0.
 .RS
 .PP
-The range U+010000\(enU+10FFFD is reserved for the future.
+The range U+00D800\(enU+00DFFF is reserved for surrogates, which
+are illegal on its own. Therefore, such sequences will result in
+the replacement character U+FFFD. Surrogate pairs should be
+encoded as single \e\fBU\fIhhhhhhhh\fR character.
 .RE
 .PP
 Backslash substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces,
@@ -79,7 +79,7 @@ against the standard Tcl library.  Extensions (stub-enabled or
 not) are not intended to call \fBTcl_Main\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Main\fR is not thread-safe.  It should only be called by
-a single master thread of a multi-threaded application.  This
+a single main thread of a multi-threaded application.  This
 restriction is not a problem with normal use described above.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Main\fR and therefore all applications based upon it, like
@@ -112,7 +112,7 @@ The file name and encoding values managed by the routines
 \fBTcl_SetStartupScript\fR and \fBTcl_GetStartupScript\fR
 are stored per-thread.  Although the storage and retrieval
 functions of these routines work in any thread, only those
-calls in the same master thread as \fBTcl_Main\fR can have
+calls in the same main thread as \fBTcl_Main\fR can have
 any influence on it.
 .PP
 The caller of \fBTcl_Main\fR may call \fBTcl_SetStartupScript\fR
@@ -126,7 +126,7 @@ a \fIstartup script\fR, and \fIname\fR is taken to be the name
 of the encoding of the contents of that file.  \fBTcl_Main\fR
 then calls \fBTcl_SetStartupScript\fR with these values.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_Main\fR then defines in its master interpreter
+\fBTcl_Main\fR then defines in its main interpreter
 the Tcl variables \fIargc\fR, \fIargv\fR, \fIargv0\fR, and
 \fItcl_interactive\fR, as described in the documentation for \fBtclsh\fR.
 .PP
@@ -154,9 +154,9 @@ When the \fIappInitProc\fR is finished, \fBTcl_Main\fR calls
 been requested, if any.  If a startup script has been provided,
 \fBTcl_Main\fR attempts to evaluate it.  Otherwise, interactive
 mode begins with examination of the variable \fItcl_rcFileName\fR
-in the master interpreter.  If that variable exists and holds the
+in the main interpreter.  If that variable exists and holds the
 name of a readable file, the contents of that file are evaluated
-in the master interpreter.  Then interactive operations begin,
+in the main interpreter.  Then interactive operations begin,
 with prompts and command evaluation results written to the standard
 output channel, and commands read from the standard input channel
 and then evaluated.  The prompts written to the standard output
@@ -164,7 +164,7 @@ channel may be customized by defining the Tcl variables \fItcl_prompt1\fR
 and \fItcl_prompt2\fR as described in the documentation for \fBtclsh\fR.
 The prompts and command evaluation results are written to the standard
 output channel only if the Tcl variable \fItcl_interactive\fR in the
-master interpreter holds a non-zero integer value.
+main interpreter holds a non-zero integer value.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SetMainLoop\fR allows setting an event loop procedure to be run.
 This allows, for example, Tk to be dynamically loaded and set its event
@@ -189,6 +189,8 @@ procedure (if any) returns.  In non-interactive mode, after
 \fBTcl_Main\fR evaluates the startup script, and the main loop
 procedure (if any) returns, \fBTcl_Main\fR will also evaluate
 the \fBexit\fR command.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_Main\fR can not be used in stub-enabled extensions.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 tclsh(1), Tcl_GetStdChannel(3), Tcl_StandardChannels(3), Tcl_AppInit(3),
 exit(n), encoding(n)
@@ -45,7 +45,9 @@ int
 .AP Tcl_Condition *condPtr in
 A condition variable, which must be associated with a mutex lock.
 .AP Tcl_Mutex *mutexPtr in
-A mutex lock.
+.VS TIP509
+A recursive mutex lock.
+.VE TIP509
 .AP "const Tcl_Time" *timePtr in
 A time limit on the condition wait.  NULL to wait forever.
 Note that a polling value of 0 seconds does not make much sense.
@@ -140,8 +142,12 @@ of code by calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR.
 If one thread holds a mutex, any other thread calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR will
 block until \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR is called.
 A mutex can be destroyed after its use by calling \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR.
-The result of locking a mutex twice from the same thread is undefined.
-On some platforms it will result in a deadlock.
+.VS TIP509
+Mutexes are reentrant: they can be locked several times from the same
+thread. However there must be exactly one call to
+\fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR for each call to \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR in order
+for a thread to release a mutex completely.
+.VE TIP509
 The \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR, \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR
 procedures are defined as empty macros if not compiling with threads enabled.
 For declaration of mutexes the \fBTCL_DECLARE_MUTEX\fR macro should be used.
@@ -13,13 +13,13 @@ Tcl_UniCharToUpper, Tcl_UniCharToLower, Tcl_UniCharToTitle, Tcl_UtfToUpper, Tcl_
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-Tcl_UniChar
+int
 \fBTcl_UniCharToUpper\fR(\fIch\fR)
 .sp
-Tcl_UniChar
+int
 \fBTcl_UniCharToLower\fR(\fIch\fR)
 .sp
-Tcl_UniChar
+int
 \fBTcl_UniCharToTitle\fR(\fIch\fR)
 .sp
 int
@@ -78,12 +78,5 @@ turns each character in the string into its lower-case equivalent.
 turns the first character in the string into its title-case equivalent
 and all following characters into their lower-case equivalents.

-.SH BUGS
-.PP
-At this time, the case conversions are only defined for the Unicode
-plane 0 characters.  The result for Unicode characters above 0xFFFF
-is undefined, but - actually - only the lower 16 bits of the
-character value is handled.
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 utf, unicode, toupper, tolower, totitle, case
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.TH Tcl_TraceVar 3 7.4 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_TraceVar 3 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
@@ -95,7 +95,7 @@ Invoke \fIproc\fR whenever an attempt is made to modify the variable.
 Invoke \fIproc\fR whenever the variable is unset.
 A variable may be unset either explicitly by an \fBunset\fR command,
 or implicitly when a procedure returns (its local variables are
-automatically unset) or when the interpreter is deleted (all
+automatically unset) or when the interpreter or namespace is deleted (all
 variables are automatically unset).
 .TP
 \fBTCL_TRACE_ARRAY\fR
@@ -160,10 +160,6 @@ The bit \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR will be set in \fIflags\fR if the trace is
 about to be destroyed;  this information may be useful to \fIproc\fR
 so that it can clean up its own internal data structures (see
 the section \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR below for more details).
-Lastly, the bit \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR will be set if the entire
-interpreter is being destroyed.
-When this bit is set, \fIproc\fR must be especially careful in
-the things it does (see the section \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR below).
 The trace procedure's return value should normally be NULL;  see
 \fBERROR RETURNS\fR below for information on other possibilities.
 .PP
@@ -330,6 +326,15 @@ During unset traces, the return value is ignored and all relevant
 trace procedures will always be invoked.
 .SH "RESTRICTIONS"
 .PP
+Because operations on variables may take place as part of the deletion
+of the interp that contains them, \fIproc\fR must be careful about checking
+what the \fIinterp\fR parameter can be used to do.
+The routine \fBTcl_InterpDeleted\fR is an important tool for this.
+When \fBTcl_InterpDeleted\fR returns 1, \fIproc\fR will not be able
+to invoke any scripts in \fIinterp\fR. You may encounter old code using
+a deprecated flag value \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR to signal this
+condition, but any supported code should be converted to stop using it.
+.PP
 A trace procedure can be called at any time, even when there
 are partially formed results stored in the interpreter.  If
 the trace procedure does anything that could damage this result (such
@@ -354,24 +359,8 @@ Traces on a variable are always removed whenever the variable
 is deleted;  the only time \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR is not set is for
 a whole-array trace invoked when only a single element of an
 array is unset.
-.SH "TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED"
-.PP
-When an interpreter is destroyed, unset traces are called for
-all of its variables.
-The \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR bit will be set in the \fIflags\fR
-argument passed to the trace procedures.
-Trace procedures must be extremely careful in what they do if
-the \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR bit is set.
-It is not safe for the procedures to invoke any Tcl procedures
-on the interpreter, since its state is partially deleted.
-All that trace procedures should do under these circumstances is
-to clean up and free their own internal data structures.
 .SH BUGS
 .PP
-Tcl does not do any error checking to prevent trace procedures
-from misusing the interpreter during traces with \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR
-set.
-.PP
 Array traces are not yet integrated with the Tcl \fBinfo exists\fR command,
 nor is there Tcl-level access to array traces.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ int
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS int ch
 .AP int ch in
-The Tcl_UniChar to be examined.
+The Unicode character to be examined.
 .BE

 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_UniChar, Tcl_UniCharToUtf, Tcl_UtfToUniChar, Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString, Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString, Tcl_UniCharLen, Tcl_UniCharNcmp, Tcl_UniCharNcasecmp, Tcl_UniCharCaseMatch, Tcl_UtfNcmp, Tcl_UtfNcasecmp, Tcl_UtfCharComplete, Tcl_NumUtfChars, Tcl_UtfFindFirst, Tcl_UtfFindLast, Tcl_UtfNext, Tcl_UtfPrev, Tcl_UniCharAtIndex, Tcl_UtfAtIndex, Tcl_UtfBackslash \- routines for manipulating UTF-8 strings
+Tcl_UniChar, Tcl_UniCharToUtf, Tcl_UtfToUniChar, Tcl_UtfToChar16, Tcl_UtfToWChar, Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString, Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString, Tcl_Char16ToUtfDString, Tcl_UtfToWCharDString, Tcl_UtfToChar16DString, Tcl_UniCharLen, Tcl_UniCharNcmp, Tcl_UniCharNcasecmp, Tcl_UniCharCaseMatch, Tcl_UtfNcmp, Tcl_UtfNcasecmp, Tcl_UtfCharComplete, Tcl_NumUtfChars, Tcl_UtfFindFirst, Tcl_UtfFindLast, Tcl_UtfNext, Tcl_UtfPrev, Tcl_UniCharAtIndex, Tcl_UtfAtIndex, Tcl_UtfBackslash \- routines for manipulating UTF-8 strings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -21,12 +21,30 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR(\fIsrc, chPtr\fR)
 .sp
+int
+\fBTcl_UtfToChar16\fR(\fIsrc, uPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_UtfToWChar\fR(\fIsrc, wPtr\fR)
+.sp
 char *
 \fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR(\fIuniStr, uniLength, dsPtr\fR)
 .sp
+char *
+\fBTcl_Char16ToUtfDString\fR(\fIuStr, uniLength, dsPtr\fR)
+.sp
+char *
+\fBTcl_WCharToUtfDString\fR(\fIwStr, uniLength, dsPtr\fR)
+.sp
 Tcl_UniChar *
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniCharDString\fR(\fIsrc, length, dsPtr\fR)
 .sp
+unsigned short *
+\fBTcl_UtfToChar16DString\fR(\fIsrc, length, dsPtr\fR)
+.sp
+wchar_t *
+\fBTcl_UtfToWCharDString\fR(\fIsrc, length, dsPtr\fR)
+.sp
 int
 \fBTcl_UniCharLen\fR(\fIuniStr\fR)
 .sp
@@ -63,7 +81,7 @@ const char *
 const char *
 \fBTcl_UtfPrev\fR(\fIsrc, start\fR)
 .sp
-Tcl_UniChar
+int
 \fBTcl_UniCharAtIndex\fR(\fIsrc, index\fR)
 .sp
 const char *
@@ -75,11 +93,15 @@ int
 .AS "const Tcl_UniChar" *uniPattern in/out
 .AP char *buf out
 Buffer in which the UTF-8 representation of the Tcl_UniChar is stored.  At most
-\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes are stored in the buffer.
+4 bytes are stored in the buffer.
 .AP int ch in
 The Unicode character to be converted or examined.
 .AP Tcl_UniChar *chPtr out
 Filled with the Tcl_UniChar represented by the head of the UTF-8 string.
+.AP unsigned short *uPtr out
+Filled with the utf-16 represented by the head of the UTF-8 string.
+.AP wchar_t *wPtr out
+Filled with the wchar_t represented by the head of the UTF-8 string.
 .AP "const char" *src in
 Pointer to a UTF-8 string.
 .AP "const char" *cs in
@@ -94,12 +116,21 @@ A null-terminated Unicode string.
 A null-terminated Unicode string.
 .AP "const Tcl_UniChar" *uniPattern in
 A null-terminated Unicode string.
+.AP "const unsigned short" *uStr in
+A null-terminated UTF-16 string.
+.AP "const wchar_t" *wStr in
+A null-terminated wchar_t string.
+.AP "const unsigned short" *utf16s in
+A null-terminated utf-16 string.
+.AP "const unsigned short" *utf16t in
+A null-terminated utf-16 string.
+.AP "const unsigned short" *utf16Pattern in
+A null-terminated utf-16 string.
 .AP int length in
 The length of the UTF-8 string in bytes (not UTF-8 characters).  If
 negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
 .AP int uniLength in
-The length of the Unicode string in characters.  Must be greater than or
-equal to 0.
+The length of the Unicode string in characters.
 .AP "Tcl_DString" *dsPtr in/out
 A pointer to a previously initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
 .AP "unsigned long" numChars in
@@ -113,7 +144,7 @@ If non-NULL, filled with the number of bytes in the backslash sequence,
 including the backslash character.
 .AP char *dst out
 Buffer in which the bytes represented by the backslash sequence are stored.
-At most \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes are stored in the buffer.
+At most 4 bytes are stored in the buffer.
 .AP int nocase in
 Specifies whether the match should be done case-sensitive (0) or
 case-insensitive (1).
@@ -121,18 +152,21 @@ case-insensitive (1).

 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-These routines convert between UTF-8 strings and Tcl_UniChars.  A
-Tcl_UniChar is a Unicode character represented as an unsigned, fixed-size
-quantity.  A UTF-8 character is a Unicode character represented as
-a varying-length sequence of up to \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes.  A multibyte UTF-8
-sequence consists of a lead byte followed by some number of trail bytes.
+These routines convert between UTF-8 strings and Unicode/Utf-16 characters.
+A UTF-8 character is a Unicode character represented as a varying-length
+sequence of up to \fB4\fR bytes.  A multibyte UTF-8 sequence
+consists of a lead byte followed by some number of trail bytes.
 .PP
-\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR is the maximum number of bytes that it takes to
-represent one Unicode character in the UTF-8 representation.
+\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR is the maximum number of bytes that \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR
+can consume in a single call.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_UniCharToUtf\fR stores the Tcl_UniChar \fIch\fR as a UTF-8 string
+\fBTcl_UniCharToUtf\fR stores the character \fIch\fR as a UTF-8 string
 in starting at \fIbuf\fR.  The return value is the number of bytes stored
-in \fIbuf\fR.
+in \fIbuf\fR. If ch is a high surrogate (range U+D800 - U+DBFF), then
+the return value will be 1 and a single byte in the range 0xF0 - 0xF4
+will be stored. If you still want to produce UTF-8 output for it (even
+though knowing it's an illegal code-point on its own), just call
+\fBTcl_UniCharToUtf\fR again specifying ch = -1.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR reads one UTF-8 character starting at \fIsrc\fR
 and stores it as a Tcl_UniChar in \fI*chPtr\fR.  The return value is the
@@ -140,13 +174,15 @@ number of bytes read from \fIsrc\fR.  The caller must ensure that the
 source buffer is long enough such that this routine does not run off the
 end and dereference non-existent or random memory; if the source buffer
 is known to be null-terminated, this will not happen.  If the input is
+a byte in the range 0x80 - 0x9F, \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR assumes the
+cp1252 encoding, stores the corresponding Tcl_UniChar in \fI*chPtr\fR
+and returns 1. If the input is otherwise
 not in proper UTF-8 format, \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR will store the first
-byte of \fIsrc\fR in \fI*chPtr\fR as a Tcl_UniChar between 0x0080 and
+byte of \fIsrc\fR in \fI*chPtr\fR as a Tcl_UniChar between 0x00A0 and
 0x00FF and return 1.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR converts the given Unicode string
 to UTF-8, storing the result in a previously initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
-You must specify \fIuniLength\fR, the length of the given Unicode string.
 The return value is a pointer to the UTF-8 representation of the
 Unicode string.  Storage for the return value is appended to the
 end of the \fBTcl_DString\fR.
@@ -200,7 +236,7 @@ of \fIlength\fR bytes is long enough to be decoded by
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR, or 0 otherwise.  This function does not guarantee
 that the UTF-8 string is properly formed.  This routine is used by
 procedures that are operating on a byte at a time and need to know if a
-full Tcl_UniChar has been seen.
+full Unicode character has been seen.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR corresponds to \fBstrlen\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
 returns the number of Tcl_UniChars that are represented by the UTF-8 string
@@ -208,12 +244,12 @@ returns the number of Tcl_UniChars that are represented by the UTF-8 string
 length is negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfFindFirst\fR corresponds to \fBstrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
-returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the Tcl_UniChar \fIch\fR
+returns a pointer to the first occurrence of the Unicode character \fIch\fR
 in the null-terminated UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The null terminator is
 considered part of the UTF-8 string.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfFindLast\fR corresponds to \fBstrrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
-returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the Tcl_UniChar \fIch\fR
+returns a pointer to the last occurrence of the Unicode character \fIch\fR
 in the null-terminated UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The null terminator is
 considered part of the UTF-8 string.
 .PP
@@ -246,21 +282,25 @@ byte \fIsrc[0]\fR nor the byte \fIstart[-1]\fR nor the byte
 \fIsrc[-\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fI-1]\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UniCharAtIndex\fR corresponds to a C string array dereference or the
-Pascal Ord() function.  It returns the Tcl_UniChar represented at the
+Pascal Ord() function.  It returns the Unicode character represented at the
 specified character (not byte) \fIindex\fR in the UTF-8 string
 \fIsrc\fR.  The source string must contain at least \fIindex\fR
-characters.  Behavior is undefined if a negative \fIindex\fR is given.
+characters.  If a negative \fIindex\fR is given or \fIindex\fR points
+to the second half of a surrogate pair, it returns -1.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfAtIndex\fR returns a pointer to the specified character (not
 byte) \fIindex\fR in the UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR.  The source string must
 contain at least \fIindex\fR characters.  This is equivalent to calling
-\fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR \fIindex\fR times.  If a negative \fIindex\fR is given,
-the return pointer points to the first character in the source string.
+\fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR \fIindex\fR times, except if that would return
+a pointer to the second byte of a valid 4-byte UTF-8 sequence, in which
+case, \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR will be called once more to find the end
+of the sequence. If a negative \fIindex\fR is given, the returned pointer
+points to the first character in the source string.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfBackslash\fR is a utility procedure used by several of the Tcl
 commands.  It parses a backslash sequence and stores the properly formed
 UTF-8 character represented by the backslash sequence in the output
-buffer \fIdst\fR.  At most \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes are stored in the buffer.
+buffer \fIdst\fR.  At most 4 bytes are stored in the buffer.
 \fBTcl_UtfBackslash\fR modifies \fI*readPtr\fR to contain the number
 of bytes in the backslash sequence, including the backslash character.
 The return value is the number of bytes stored in the output buffer.
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.TH abstract n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
+.so man.macros
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+oo::abstract \- a class that does not allow direct instances of itself
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+package require TclOO
+
+\fBoo::abstract\fI method \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
+.fi
+.SH "CLASS HIERARCHY"
+.nf
+\fBoo::object\fR
+   \(-> \fBoo::class\fR
+       \(-> \fBoo::abstract\fR
+.fi
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Abstract classes are classes that can contain definitions, but which cannot be
+directly manufactured; they are intended to only ever be inherited from and
+instantiated indirectly. The characteristic methods of \fBoo::class\fR
+(\fBcreate\fR and \fBnew\fR) are not exported by an instance of
+\fBoo::abstract\fR.
+.PP
+Note that \fBoo::abstract\fR is not itself an instance of \fBoo::abstract\fR.
+.SS CONSTRUCTOR
+The \fBoo::abstract\fR class does not define an explicit constructor; this
+means that it is effectively the same as the constructor of the
+\fBoo::class\fR class.
+.SS DESTRUCTOR
+The \fBoo::abstract\fR class does not define an explicit destructor;
+destroying an instance of it is just like destroying an ordinary class (and
+will destroy all its subclasses).
+.SS "EXPORTED METHODS"
+The \fBoo::abstract\fR class defines no new exported methods.
+.SS "NON-EXPORTED METHODS"
+The \fBoo::abstract\fR class explicitly states that \fBcreate\fR,
+\fBcreateWithNamespace\fR, and \fBnew\fR are unexported.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.PP
+This example defines a simple class hierarchy and creates a new instance of
+it. It then invokes a method of the object before destroying the hierarchy and
+showing that the destruction is transitive.
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBoo::abstract\fR create fruit {
+    method eat {} {
+        puts "yummy!"
+    }
+}
+oo::class create banana {
+    superclass fruit
+    method peel {} {
+        puts "skin now off"
+    }
+}
+set b [banana \fBnew\fR]
+$b peel              \fI\(-> prints 'skin now off'\fR
+$b eat               \fI\(-> prints 'yummy!'\fR
+set f [fruit new]    \fI\(-> error 'unknown method "new"...'\fR
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+oo::define(n), oo::object(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+abstract class, class, metaclass, object
+.\" Local variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -20,6 +20,11 @@ Append all of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to the current value
 of variable \fIvarName\fR.  If \fIvarName\fR does not exist,
 it is given a value equal to the concatenation of all the
 \fIvalue\fR arguments.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIvarName\fR indicate an element that does not exist of an array that has
+a default value set, the concatenation of the default value and all the
+\fIvalue\fR arguments will be stored in the array element.
+.VE TIP508
 The result of this command is the new value stored in variable
 \fIvarName\fR.
 This command provides an efficient way to build up long
@@ -44,6 +49,7 @@ puts $var
 concat(n), lappend(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 append, variable
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
+.\" Local variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.TH array n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH array n 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .so man.macros
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
@@ -36,6 +36,53 @@ with an empty name, since the return value from
 \fBarray nextelement\fR will not indicate whether the search
 has been completed.
 .TP
+\fBarray default \fIsubcommand arrayName args...\fR
+.VS TIP508
+Manages the default value of the array. Arrays initially have no default
+value, but this command allows you to set one; the default value will be
+returned when reading from an element of the array \fIarrayName\fR if the read
+would otherwise result in an error. Note that this may cause the \fBappend\fR,
+\fBdict\fR, \fBincr\fR and \fBlappend\fR commands to change their behavior in
+relation to non-existing array elements.
+.RS
+.PP
+The \fIsubcommand\fR argument controls what exact operation will be performed
+on the default value of \fIarrayName\fR. Supported \fIsubcommand\fRs are:
+.VE TIP508
+.TP
+\fBarray default exists \fIarrayName\fR
+.VS TIP508
+This returns a boolean value indicating whether a default value has been set
+for the array \fIarrayName\fR. Returns a false value if \fIarrayName\fR does
+not exist. Raises an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing variable that is
+not an array.
+.VE TIP508
+.TP
+\fBarray default get \fIarrayName\fR
+.VS TIP508
+This returns the current default value for the array \fIarrayName\fR.  Raises
+an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing variable that is not an array, or
+if \fIarrayName\fR is an array without a default value.
+.VE TIP508
+.TP
+\fBarray default set \fIarrayName value\fR
+.VS TIP508
+This sets the default value for the array \fIarrayName\fR to \fIvalue\fR.
+Returns the empty string. Raises an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing
+variable that is not an array, or if \fIarrayName\fR is an illegal name for an
+array. If \fIarrayName\fR does not currently exist, it is created as an empty
+array as well as having its default value set.
+.VE TIP508
+.TP
+\fBarray default unset \fIarrayName\fR
+.VS TIP508
+This removes the default value for the array \fIarrayName\fR and returns the
+empty string. Does nothing if \fIarrayName\fR does not have a default
+value. Raises an error if \fIarrayName\fR is an existing variable that is not
+an array.
+.VE TIP508
+.RE
+.TP
 \fBarray donesearch \fIarrayName searchId\fR
 This command terminates an array search and destroys all the
 state associated with that search.  \fISearchId\fR indicates
@@ -47,6 +94,15 @@ been the return value from a previous invocation of
 Returns 1 if \fIarrayName\fR is an array variable, 0 if there
 is no variable by that name or if it is a scalar variable.
 .TP
+\fBarray for {\fIkeyVariable valueVariable\fB} \fIarrayName body\fP
+The first argument is a two element list of variable names for the
+key and value of each entry in the array.  The second argument is the
+array name to iterate over.  The third argument is the body to execute
+for each key and value returned.
+The ordering of the returned keys is undefined.
+If an array element is deleted or a new array element is inserted during
+the \fIarray for\fP process, the command will terminate with an error.
+.TP
 \fBarray get \fIarrayName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
 Returns a list containing pairs of elements.  The first
 element in each pair is the name of an element in \fIarrayName\fR
@@ -185,3 +241,7 @@ foreach color [lsort [\fBarray names\fR colorcount]] {
 list(n), string(n), variable(n), trace(n), foreach(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 array, element names, search
+.\" Local variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -12,12 +12,10 @@
 .SH NAME
 binary \- Insert and extract fields from binary strings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-.VS 8.6
 \fBbinary decode \fIformat\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR? \fIdata\fR
 .br
 \fBbinary encode \fIformat\fR ?\fI\-option value ...\fR? \fIdata\fR
 .br
-.VE 8.6
 \fBbinary format \fIformatString \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .br
 \fBbinary scan \fIstring formatString \fR?\fIvarName varName ...\fR?
@@ -31,11 +29,9 @@ architecture, it might produce an 8-byte binary string consisting of
 two 4-byte integers, one for each of the numbers.  The subcommand
 \fBbinary scan\fR, does the opposite: it extracts data
 from a binary string and returns it as ordinary Tcl string values.
-.VS 8.6
 The \fBbinary encode\fR and \fBbinary decode\fR subcommands convert
 binary data to or from string encodings such as base64 (used in MIME
 messages for example).
-.VE 8.6
 .PP
 Note that other operations on binary data, such as taking a subsequence of it,
 getting its length, or reinterpreting it as a string in some encoding, are
@@ -44,7 +40,6 @@ done by other Tcl commands (respectively \fBstring range\fR,
 binary string in Tcl is merely one where all the characters it contains are in
 the range \eu0000\-\eu00FF.
 .SH "BINARY ENCODE AND DECODE"
-.VS 8.6
 .PP
 When encoding binary data as a readable string, the starting binary data is
 passed to the \fBbinary encode\fR command, together with the name of the
@@ -135,7 +130,6 @@ between the encoder and decoder.
 Note that neither the encoder nor the decoder handle the header and footer of
 the uuencode format.
 .RE
-.VE 8.6
 .SH "BINARY FORMAT"
 .PP
 The \fBbinary format\fR command generates a binary string whose layout
@@ -150,7 +144,9 @@ Most field specifiers consume one argument to obtain the value to be
 formatted.  The type character specifies how the value is to be
 formatted.  The \fIcount\fR typically indicates how many items of the
 specified type are taken from the value.  If present, the \fIcount\fR
-is a non-negative decimal integer or \fB*\fR, which normally indicates
+is a non-negative decimal integer or
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+which normally indicates
 that all of the items in the value are to be used.  If the number of
 arguments does not match the number of fields in the format string
 that consume arguments, then an error is generated. The flag character
@@ -158,6 +154,7 @@ is ignored for \fBbinary format\fR.
 .PP
 Here is a small example to clarify the relation between the field
 specifiers and the arguments:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR d3d {1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0} 0.1
 .CE
@@ -185,29 +182,63 @@ not part of the ISO 8859\-1 character set.)
 If \fIarg\fR has fewer than \fIcount\fR bytes, then additional zero
 bytes are used to pad out the field.  If \fIarg\fR is longer than the
 specified length, the extra characters will be ignored.  If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the bytes in \fIarg\fR will be
+\fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the bytes in \fIarg\fR will be
 formatted.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one character will be
-formatted.  For example,
+formatted.  For example, the command:
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a7a*a alpha bravo charlie
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fBalpha\e000\e000bravoc\fR,
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBalpha\e000\e000bravoc\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+the command:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a* [encoding convertto utf-8 \eu20ac]
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\e342\e202\e254\fR (which is the
-UTF-8 byte sequence for a Euro-currency character) and
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\e342\e202\e254\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+(which is the
+UTF-8 byte sequence for a Euro-currency character), and the command:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a* [encoding convertto iso8859-15 \eu20ac]
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\e244\fR (which is the ISO
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\e244\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+(which is the ISO
 8859\-15 byte sequence for a Euro-currency character). Contrast these
 last two with:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a* \eu20ac
 .CE
-which returns a string equivalent to \fB\e254\fR (i.e. \fB\exac\fR) by
+.PP
+which returns a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\e254\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+(i.e. \fB\exac\fR) by
 truncating the high-bits of the character, and which is probably not
 what is desired.
 .RE
@@ -215,42 +246,62 @@ what is desired.
 This form is the same as \fBa\fR except that spaces are used for
 padding instead of nulls.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR A6A*A alpha bravo charlie
 .CE
-will return \fBalpha bravoc\fR.
+.PP
+will return
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBalpha bravoc\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBb\fR 5
 Stores a string of \fIcount\fR binary digits in low-to-high order
-within each byte in the output string.  \fIArg\fR must contain a
+within each byte in the output binary string.  \fIArg\fR must contain a
 sequence of \fB1\fR and \fB0\fR characters.  The resulting bytes are
 emitted in first to last order with the bits being formatted in
 low-to-high order within each byte.  If \fIarg\fR has fewer than
 \fIcount\fR digits, then zeros will be used for the remaining bits.
 If \fIarg\fR has more than the specified number of digits, the extra
-digits will be ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the
+digits will be ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the
 digits in \fIarg\fR will be formatted.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted,
 then one digit will be formatted.  If the number of bits formatted
 does not end at a byte boundary, the remaining bits of the last byte
 will be zeros.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR b5b* 11100 111000011010
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\ex07\ex87\ex05\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\ex07\ex87\ex05\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBB\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBb\fR except that the bits are stored in
 high-to-low order within each byte.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR B5B* 11100 111000011010
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\exe0\exe1\exa0\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\exe0\exe1\exa0\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBH\fR 5
 Stores a string of \fIcount\fR hexadecimal digits in high-to-low
-within each byte in the output string.  \fIArg\fR must contain a
+within each byte in the output binary string.  \fIArg\fR must contain a
 sequence of characters in the set
 .QW 0123456789abcdefABCDEF .
 The resulting bytes are emitted in first to last order with the hex digits
@@ -258,43 +309,66 @@ being formatted in high-to-low order within each byte.  If \fIarg\fR
 has fewer than \fIcount\fR digits, then zeros will be used for the
 remaining digits.  If \fIarg\fR has more than the specified number of
 digits, the extra digits will be ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is
-\fB*\fR, then all of the digits in \fIarg\fR will be formatted.  If
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the digits in \fIarg\fR will be formatted.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one digit will be formatted.  If the
 number of digits formatted does not end at a byte boundary, the
 remaining bits of the last byte will be zeros.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR H3H*H2 ab DEF 987
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\exab\ex00\exde\exf0\ex98\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\exab\ex00\exde\exf0\ex98\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBh\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBH\fR except that the digits are stored in
 low-to-high order within each byte. This is seldom required. For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR h3h*h2 AB def 987
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\exba\ex00\exed\ex0f\ex89\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\exba\ex00\exed\ex0f\ex89\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBc\fR 5
 Stores one or more 8-bit integer values in the output string.  If no
 \fIcount\fR is specified, then \fIarg\fR must consist of an integer
 value. If \fIcount\fR is specified, \fIarg\fR must consist of a list
 containing at least that many integers. The low-order 8 bits of each integer
-are stored as a one-byte value at the cursor position.  If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the integers in the list are formatted. If the
+are stored as a one-byte value at the cursor position.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the integers in the list are formatted. If the
 number of elements in the list is greater
 than \fIcount\fR, then the extra elements are ignored.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR c3cc* {3 -3 128 1} 260 {2 5}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\ex03\exfd\ex80\ex04\ex02\ex05\fR, whereas
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\ex03\exfd\ex80\ex04\ex02\ex05\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+whereas:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR c {2 5}
 .CE
+.PP
 will generate an error.
 .RE
 .IP \fBs\fR 5
@@ -304,22 +378,32 @@ low-order 16-bits of each integer are stored as a two-byte value at
 the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR s3 {3 -3 258 1}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\ex03\ex00\exfd\exff\ex02\ex01\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\ex03\ex00\exfd\exff\ex02\ex01\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBS\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBs\fR except that it stores one or more
 16-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR S3 {3 -3 258 1}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\ex00\ex03\exff\exfd\ex01\ex02\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\ex00\ex03\exff\exfd\ex01\ex02\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBt\fR 5
 This form (mnemonically \fItiny\fR) is the same as \fBs\fR and \fBS\fR
@@ -334,22 +418,32 @@ low-order 32-bits of each integer are stored as a four-byte value at
 the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR i3 {3 -3 65536 1}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
 \fB\ex03\ex00\ex00\ex00\exfd\exff\exff\exff\ex00\ex00\ex01\ex00\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBI\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBi\fR except that it stores one or more one
 or more 32-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string.
 For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR I3 {3 -3 65536 1}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
 \fB\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex03\exff\exff\exff\exfd\ex00\ex01\ex00\ex00\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBn\fR 5
 This form (mnemonically \fInumber\fR or \fInormal\fR) is the same as
@@ -365,20 +459,24 @@ low-order 64-bits of each integer are stored as an eight-byte value at
 the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR w 7810179016327718216
 .CE
-will return the string \fBHelloTcl\fR
+.PP
+will return the binary string \fBHelloTcl\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBW\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBw\fR except that it stores one or more one
 or more 64-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string.
 For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR Wc 4785469626960341345 110
 .CE
-will return the string \fBBigEndian\fR
+.PP
+will return the binary string \fBBigEndian\fR
 .RE
 .IP \fBm\fR 5
 This form (mnemonically the mirror of \fBw\fR) is the same as \fBw\fR
@@ -401,11 +499,16 @@ double-precision floating point numbers internally, there may be some
 loss of precision in the conversion to single-precision.  For example,
 on a Windows system running on an Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR f2 {1.6 3.4}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\excd\excc\excc\ex3f\ex9a\ex99\ex59\ex40\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\excd\excc\excc\ex3f\ex9a\ex99\ex59\ex40\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBr\fR 5
 This form (mnemonically \fIreal\fR) is the same as \fBf\fR except that
@@ -422,11 +525,16 @@ or more double-precision floating point numbers in the machine's native
 representation in the output string.  For example, on a
 Windows system running on an Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR d1 {1.6}
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\ex9a\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\exf9\ex3f\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fB\ex9a\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\exf9\ex3f\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBq\fR 5
 This form (mnemonically the mirror of \fBd\fR) is the same as \fBd\fR
@@ -439,26 +547,37 @@ This form is the same as \fBq\fR except that it stores the
 double-precision floating point numbers in big-endian order.
 .IP \fBx\fR 5
 Stores \fIcount\fR null bytes in the output string.  If \fIcount\fR is
-not specified, stores one null byte.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR,
+not specified, stores one null byte.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
 generates an error.  This type does not consume an argument.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a3xa3x2a3 abc def ghi
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fBabc\e000def\e000\e000ghi\fR.
+.PP
+will return a binary string equivalent to:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBabc\e000def\e000\e000ghi\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBX\fR 5
 Moves the cursor back \fIcount\fR bytes in the output string.  If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the current cursor position,
+\fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR
+or is larger than the current cursor position,
 then the cursor is positioned at location 0 so that the next byte
 stored will be the first byte in the result string.  If \fIcount\fR is
 omitted then the cursor is moved back one byte.  This type does not
 consume an argument.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a3X*a3X2a3 abc def ghi
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fBdghi\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fB@\fR 5
@@ -467,14 +586,22 @@ specified by \fIcount\fR.  Position 0 refers to the first byte in the
 output string.  If \fIcount\fR refers to a position beyond the last
 byte stored so far, then null bytes will be placed in the uninitialized
 locations and the cursor will be placed at the specified location.  If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then the cursor is moved to the current end of
+\fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then the cursor is moved to the current end of
 the output string.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then an error will be
 generated.  This type does not consume an argument. For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary format\fR a5@2a1@*a3@10a1 abcde f ghi j
 .CE
-will return \fBabfdeghi\e000\e000j\fR.
+.PP
+will return
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBabfdeghi\e000\e000j\fR
+.CE
 .RE
 .SH "BINARY SCAN"
 .PP
@@ -496,8 +623,9 @@ argument to obtain the variable into which the scanned values should
 be placed.  The type character specifies how the binary data is to be
 interpreted.  The \fIcount\fR typically indicates how many items of
 the specified type are taken from the data.  If present, the
-\fIcount\fR is a non-negative decimal integer or \fB*\fR, which
-normally indicates that all of the remaining items in the data are to
+\fIcount\fR is a non-negative decimal integer or
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+which normally indicates that all of the remaining items in the data are to
 be used.  If there are not enough bytes left after the current cursor
 position to satisfy the current field specifier, then the
 corresponding variable is left untouched and \fBbinary scan\fR returns
@@ -511,6 +639,7 @@ is accepted for all field types but is ignored for non-integer fields.
 A similar example as with \fBbinary format\fR should explain the
 relation between field specifiers and arguments in case of the binary
 scan subcommand:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR $bytes s3s first second
 .CE
@@ -522,12 +651,15 @@ If \fIbytes\fR contains fewer than 8 bytes (i.e. four 2-byte
 integers), no assignment to \fIsecond\fR will be made, and if
 \fIbytes\fR contains fewer than 6 bytes (i.e. three 2-byte integers),
 no assignment to \fIfirst\fR will be made.  Hence:
+.PP
 .CS
 puts [\fBbinary scan\fR abcdefg s3s first second]
 puts $first
 puts $second
 .CE
+.PP
 will print (assuming neither variable is set previously):
+.PP
 .CS
 1
 25185 25699 26213
@@ -539,14 +671,17 @@ It is \fIimportant\fR to note that the \fBc\fR, \fBs\fR, and \fBS\fR
 long data size values.  In doing this, values that have their high
 bit set (0x80 for chars, 0x8000 for shorts, 0x80000000 for ints),
 will be sign extended.  Thus the following will occur:
+.PP
 .CS
 set signShort [\fBbinary format\fR s1 0x8000]
 \fBbinary scan\fR $signShort s1 val; \fI# val == 0xFFFF8000\fR
 .CE
+.PP
 If you require unsigned values you can include the
 .QW u
 flag character following
 the field type. For example, to read an unsigned short value:
+.PP
 .CS
 set signShort [\fBbinary format\fR s1 0x8000]
 \fBbinary scan\fR $signShort su1 val; \fI# val == 0x00008000\fR
@@ -557,8 +692,9 @@ reading bytes from the current position.  The cursor is initially
 at position 0 at the beginning of the data.  The type may be any one of
 the following characters:
 .IP \fBa\fR 5
-The data is a byte string of length \fIcount\fR.  If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be
+The data is a byte string of length \fIcount\fR.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be
 scanned into the variable.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
 byte will be scanned.
 All bytes scanned will be interpreted as being characters in the
@@ -567,24 +703,30 @@ needed if the string is not a binary string or a string encoded in ISO
 8859\-1.
 For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR abcde\e000fghi a6a10 var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB1\fR with the string equivalent to \fBabcde\e000\fR
 stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fIvar2\fR left unmodified, and
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \e342\e202\e254 a* var1
 set var2 [encoding convertfrom utf-8 $var1]
 .CE
+.PP
 will store a Euro-currency character in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBA\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBa\fR, except trailing blanks and nulls are stripped from
 the scanned value before it is stored in the variable.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR "abc efghi  \e000" A* var1
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB1\fR with \fBabc efghi\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBb\fR 5
@@ -595,13 +737,16 @@ and
 .QW 0
 characters.  The data bytes are scanned in first to last order with
 the bits being taken in low-to-high order within each byte.  Any extra
-bits in the last byte are ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bits in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+bits in the last byte are ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining bits in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one bit will be scanned.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\ex87\ex05 b5b* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB11100\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
 \fB1110000110100000\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
@@ -609,9 +754,11 @@ will return \fB2\fR with \fB11100\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
 This form is the same as \fBb\fR, except the bits are taken in
 high-to-low order within each byte.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex70\ex87\ex05 B5B* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB01110\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
 \fB1000011100000101\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
@@ -622,13 +769,16 @@ high-to-low order represented as a sequence of characters in the set
 The data bytes are scanned in first to last
 order with the hex digits being taken in high-to-low order within each
 byte. Any extra bits in the last byte are ignored. If \fIcount\fR is
-\fB*\fR, then all of the remaining hex digits in \fIstring\fR will be
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining hex digits in \fIstring\fR will be
 scanned. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one hex digit will be
 scanned. For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\exC6\ex05\ex1f\ex34 H3H* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB07c\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
 \fB051f34\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
@@ -636,9 +786,11 @@ will return \fB2\fR with \fB07c\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
 This form is the same as \fBH\fR, except the digits are taken in
 reverse (low-to-high) order within each byte. For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\ex86\ex05\ex12\ex34 h3h* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB706\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
 \fB502143\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .PP
@@ -647,135 +799,151 @@ multiple bytes in order should use the \fBH\fR format.
 .RE
 .IP \fBc\fR 5
 The data is turned into \fIcount\fR 8-bit signed integers and stored
-in the corresponding variable as a list. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR,
+in the corresponding variable as a list, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBc\fR. If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
 then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 8-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\ex86\ex05 c2c* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB7 -122\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB5\fR
-stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
-they can be converted to unsigned 8-bit quantities using an expression
-like:
-.CS
-set num [expr { $num & 0xFF }]
-.CE
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed unless
+\fBcu\fR in place of \fBc\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBs\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers
-represented in little-endian byte order.  The integers are stored in
-the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+represented in little-endian byte order, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBs\fR.  The integers are stored in
+the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 16-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex05\ex00\ex07\ex00\exf0\exff s2s* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
-stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
-they can be converted to unsigned 16-bit quantities using an expression
-like:
-.CS
-set num [expr { $num & 0xFFFF }]
-.CE
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed unless
+\fBsu\fR is used in place of \fBs\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBS\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBs\fR except that the data is interpreted
-as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
+as \fIcount\fR 16-bit integers represented in big-endian byte
 order.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex00\ex05\ex00\ex07\exff\exf0 S2S* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
 stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBt\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers
 represented in the native byte order of the machine running the Tcl
-script.  It is otherwise identical to \fBs\fR and \fBS\fR.
+script, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBt\fR.  It is otherwise identical to \fBs\fR and \fBS\fR.
 To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
 the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
 .IP \fBi\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers
-represented in little-endian byte order.  The integers are stored in
-the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+represented in little-endian byte order, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBi\fR.  The integers are stored in
+the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 32-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 set str \ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\ex00\ex00\ex00\exf0\exff\exff\exff
 \fBbinary scan\fR $str i2i* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
-stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
-they can be converted to unsigned 32-bit quantities using an expression
-like:
-.CS
-set num [expr { $num & 0xFFFFFFFF }]
-.CE
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed unless
+\fBiu\fR is used in place of \fBi\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBI\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBI\fR except that the data is interpreted
 as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
-order.  For example,
+order, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBI\fR.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 set str \ex00\ex00\ex00\ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\exff\exff\exff\exf0
 \fBbinary scan\fR $str I2I* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
 stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBn\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers
 represented in the native byte order of the machine running the Tcl
-script.  It is otherwise identical to \fBi\fR and \fBI\fR.
+script, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBn\fR.  It is otherwise identical to \fBi\fR and \fBI\fR.
 To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
 the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
 .IP \fBw\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 64-bit signed integers
-represented in little-endian byte order.  The integers are stored in
-the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+represented in little-endian byte order, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBw\fR.  The integers are stored in
+the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 64-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 set str \ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\ex00\ex00\ex00\exf0\exff\exff\exff
 \fBbinary scan\fR $str wi* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB30064771077\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
-\fB\-16\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are
-signed and cannot be represented by Tcl as unsigned values.
+\fB\-16\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBW\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBw\fR except that the data is interpreted
 as \fIcount\fR 64-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
-order.  For example,
+order, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBW\fR.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 set str \ex00\ex00\ex00\ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\exff\exff\exff\exf0
 \fBbinary scan\fR $str WI* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB21474836487\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
 stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBm\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 64-bit signed integers
 represented in the native byte order of the machine running the Tcl
-script.  It is otherwise identical to \fBw\fR and \fBW\fR.
+script, or as unsigned if \fBu\fR is placed
+immediately after the \fBm\fR.  It is otherwise identical to \fBw\fR and \fBW\fR.
 To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
 the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
 .IP \fBf\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR single-precision floating point
 numbers in the machine's native representation.  The floating point
 numbers are stored in the corresponding variable as a list.  If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining bytes in
+\fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR ,
+then all of the remaining bytes in
 \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
 single-precision floating point number will be scanned.  The size of a
 floating point number may vary across architectures, so the number of
@@ -784,9 +952,11 @@ valid floating point number, the resulting value is undefined and
 compiler dependent.  For example, on a Windows system running on an
 Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex3f\excc\excc\excd f var1
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB1\fR with \fB1.6000000238418579\fR stored in
 \fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
@@ -806,9 +976,11 @@ as \fIcount\fR double-precision floating point numbers in the
 machine's native representation. For example, on a Windows system
 running on an Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex9a\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\exf9\ex3f d var1
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB1\fR with \fB1.6000000000000001\fR
 stored in \fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
@@ -824,28 +996,36 @@ order.  This conversion is not portable to the minority of systems not
 using IEEE floating point representations.
 .IP \fBx\fR 5
 Moves the cursor forward \fIcount\fR bytes in \fIstring\fR.  If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the number of bytes after the
+\fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR
+or is larger than the number of bytes after the
 current cursor position, then the cursor is positioned after
 the last byte in \fIstring\fR.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then the
 cursor is moved forward one byte.  Note that this type does not
 consume an argument.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex01\ex02\ex03\ex04 x2H* var1
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB1\fR with \fB0304\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBX\fR 5
 Moves the cursor back \fIcount\fR bytes in \fIstring\fR.  If
-\fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the current cursor position,
+\fIcount\fR is
+.QW \fB*\fR
+or is larger than the current cursor position,
 then the cursor is positioned at location 0 so that the next byte
 scanned will be the first byte in \fIstring\fR.  If \fIcount\fR
 is omitted then the cursor is moved back one byte.  Note that this
 type does not consume an argument.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex01\ex02\ex03\ex04 c2XH* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
 stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
@@ -856,9 +1036,11 @@ by \fIcount\fR.  Note that position 0 refers to the first byte in
 \fIstring\fR, then the cursor is positioned after the last byte.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then an error will be generated.  For example,
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBbinary scan\fR \ex01\ex02\ex03\ex04 c2@1H* var1 var2
 .CE
+.PP
 will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
 stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.TH callback n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
+.so man.macros
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+callback, mymethod \- generate callbacks to methods
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+package require TclOO
+
+\fBcallback\fR \fImethodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
+\fBmymethod\fR \fImethodName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
+.fi
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBcallback\fR command,
+'\" Based on notes in the tcllib docs, we know the provenance of mymethod
+also called \fBmymethod\fR for compatibility with the ooutil and snit packages
+of Tcllib,
+and which should only be used from within the context of a call to a method
+(i.e. inside a method, constructor or destructor body) is used to generate a
+script fragment that will invoke the method, \fImethodName\fR, on the current
+object (as reported by \fBself\fR) when executed. Any additional arguments
+provided will be provided as leading arguments to the callback. The resulting
+script fragment shall be a proper list.
+.PP
+Note that it is up to the caller to ensure that the current object is able to
+handle the call of \fImethodName\fR; this command does not check that.
+\fImethodName\fR may refer to any exported or unexported method, but may not
+refer to a private method as those can only be invoked directly from within
+methods. If there is no such method present at the point when the callback is
+invoked, the standard \fBunknown\fR method handler will be called.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+This is a simple echo server class. The \fBcallback\fR command is used in two
+places, to arrange for the incoming socket connections to be handled by the
+\fIAccept\fR method, and to arrange for the incoming bytes on those
+connections to be handled by the \fIReceive\fR method.
+.PP
+.CS
+oo::class create EchoServer {
+    variable server clients
+    constructor {port} {
+        set server [socket -server [\fBcallback\fR Accept] $port]
+        set clients {}
+    }
+    destructor {
+        chan close $server
+        foreach client [dict keys $clients] {
+            chan close $client
+        }
+    }
+
+    method Accept {channel clientAddress clientPort} {
+        dict set clients $channel [dict create \e
+                address $clientAddress port $clientPort]
+        chan event $channel readable [\fBcallback\fR Receive $channel]
+    }
+    method Receive {channel} {
+        if {[chan gets $channel line] >= 0} {
+            my echo $channel $line
+        } else {
+            chan close $channel
+            dict unset clients $channel
+        }
+    }
+
+    method echo {channel line} {
+        dict with clients $channel {
+            chan puts $channel \e
+                    [format {[%s:%d] %s} $address $port $line]
+        }
+    }
+}
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+chan(n), fileevent(n), my(n), self(n), socket(n), trace(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+callback, object
+.\" Local Variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -56,9 +56,7 @@ When the return code from evaluation of \fIscript\fR is
 \fBTCL_ERROR\fR, four additional entries are defined in the dictionary
 of return options stored in \fIoptionsVarName\fR: \fB\-errorinfo\fR,
 \fB\-errorcode\fR, \fB\-errorline\fR, and
-.VS 8.6
 \fB\-errorstack\fR.
-.VE 8.6
 The value of the \fB\-errorinfo\fR entry is a formatted stack trace containing
 more information about the context in which the error happened.  The formatted
 stack trace is meant to be read by a person.  The value of the
@@ -67,7 +65,6 @@ list.  The \fB\-errorcode\fR value is meant to be further processed by
 programs, and may not be particularly readable by people.  The value of the
 \fB\-errorline\fR entry is an integer indicating which line of \fIscript\fR
 was being evaluated when the error occurred.
-.VS 8.6
 The value of the \fB\-errorstack\fR entry is an
 even-sized list made of token-parameter pairs accumulated while
 unwinding the stack. The token may be
@@ -87,14 +84,11 @@ the static text of the calling sites, and
 .IP [3]
 it is coarser-grained, with only one element per stack frame (like procs; no
 separate elements for \fBforeach\fR constructs for example).
-.VE 8.6
 .PP
 The values of the \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR entries of
 the most recent error are also available as values of the global
 variables \fB::errorInfo\fR and \fB::errorCode\fR respectively.
-.VS 8.6
 The value of the \fB\-errorstack\fR entry surfaces as \fBinfo errorstack\fR.
-.VE 8.6
 .PP
 Tcl packages may provide commands that set other entries in the
 dictionary of return options, and the \fBreturn\fR command may be
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ home directory (as specified in the HOME environment variable) if
 Returns an empty string.
 Note that the current working directory is a per-process resource; the
 \fBcd\fR command changes the working directory for all interpreters
-and (in a threaded environment) all threads.
+and all threads.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
 Change to the home directory of the user \fBfred\fR:
@@ -41,3 +41,7 @@ current one:
 filename(n), glob(n), pwd(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 working directory
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -35,7 +35,6 @@ turned on by default.
 .
 Close and destroy the channel called \fIchannelId\fR. Note that this
 deletes all existing file-events registered on the channel.
-.VS 8.6
 If the \fIdirection\fR argument (which must be \fBread\fR or \fBwrite\fR or
 any unique abbreviation of them) is present, the channel will only be
 half-closed, so that it can go from being read-write to write-only or
@@ -45,7 +44,6 @@ write-only channels. Without the \fIdirection\fR argument, the channel is
 closed for both reading and writing (but only if those directions are
 currently open). It is an error to close a read-only channel for writing, or a
 write-only channel for reading.
-.VE 8.6
 .RS
 .PP
 As part of closing the channel, all buffered output is flushed to the
@@ -83,12 +81,10 @@ an error occurs while flushing output.  If a command in a command
 pipeline created with \fBopen\fR returns an error, \fBchan close\fR
 generates an error (similar to the \fBexec\fR command.)
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 Note that half-closes of sockets and command pipelines can have important side
 effects because they result in a shutdown() or close() of the underlying
 system resource, which can change how other processes or systems respond to
 the Tcl program.
-.VE 8.6
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBchan configure \fIchannelId\fR ?\fIoptionName\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoptionName value\fR?...
@@ -540,7 +536,6 @@ an extremely long line that exceeds the available memory to buffer it).
 Returns -1 if the channel was not opened for the mode in question.
 .TP
 \fBchan pipe\fR
-.VS 8.6
 Creates a standalone pipe whose read- and write-side channels are
 returned as a 2-element list, the first element being the read side and
 the second the write side. Can be useful e.g. to redirect
@@ -561,16 +556,13 @@ is most likely to show up when using pipelines for testing; care should be
 taken to ensure that deadlocks do not occur and that potential short reads are
 allowed for.
 .RE
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBchan pop \fIchannelId\fR
-.VS 8.6
 Removes the topmost transformation from the channel \fIchannelId\fR, if there
 is any. If there are no transformations added to \fIchannelId\fR, this is
 equivalent to \fBchan close\fR of that channel. The result is normally the
 empty string, but can be an error in some situations (i.e. where the
 underlying system stream is closed and that results in an error).
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBchan postevent \fIchannelId eventSpec\fR
 .
@@ -609,7 +601,6 @@ executed in the interpreter that set them up.
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBchan push \fIchannelId cmdPrefix\fR
-.VS 8.6
 Adds a new transformation on top of the channel \fIchannelId\fR. The
 \fIcmdPrefix\fR argument describes a list of one or more words which represent
 a handler that will be used to implement the transformation. The command
@@ -618,7 +609,6 @@ The result of this subcommand is a handle to the transformation. Note that it
 is important to make sure that the transformation is capable of supporting the
 channel mode that it is used with or this can make the channel neither
 readable nor writable.
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBchan puts\fR ?\fB\-nonewline\fR? ?\fIchannelId\fR? \fIstring\fR
 .
@@ -782,7 +772,7 @@ set offset 0
 \fI# Search for string "FOOBAR" in the file\fR
 while {[\fBchan gets\fR $f line] >= 0} {
    set idx [string first FOOBAR $line]
-    if {$idx > -1} {
+    if {$idx >= 0} {
        \fI# Found it; rewrite line\fR

        \fBchan seek\fR $f [expr {$offset + $idx}]
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2011-2015 Andreas Kupries
+'\" Copyright (c) 2018 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.TH classvariable n 0.3 TclOO "TclOO Commands"
+.so man.macros
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+classvariable \- create link from local variable to variable in class
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+package require TclOO
+
+\fBclassvariable\fR \fIvariableName\fR ?\fI...\fR?
+.fi
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBclassvariable\fR command is available within methods. It takes a series
+of one or more variable names and makes them available in the method's scope;
+those variable names must not be qualified and must not refer to array
+elements. The originating scope for the variables is the namespace of the
+class that the method was defined by. In other words, the referenced variables
+are shared between all instances of that class.
+.PP
+Note: This command is equivalent to the command \fBtypevariable\fR provided by
+the snit package in tcllib for approximately the same purpose. If used in a
+method defined directly on a class instance (e.g., through the
+\fBoo::objdefine\fR \fBmethod\fR definition) this is very much like just
+using:
+.PP
+.CS
+namespace upvar [namespace current] $var $var
+.CE
+.PP
+for each variable listed to \fBclassvariable\fR.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+This class counts how many instances of it have been made.
+.PP
+.CS
+oo::class create Counted {
+    initialise {
+        variable count 0
+    }
+
+    variable number
+    constructor {} {
+        \fBclassvariable\fR count
+        set number [incr count]
+    }
+
+    method report {} {
+        \fBclassvariable\fR count
+        puts "This is instance $number of $count"
+    }
+}
+
+set a [Counted new]
+set b [Counted new]
+$a report
+        \fI\(-> This is instance 1 of 2\fR
+set c [Counted new]
+$b report
+        \fI\(-> This is instance 2 of 3\fR
+$c report
+        \fI\(-> This is instance 3 of 3\fR
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+global(n), namespace(n), oo::class(n), oo::define(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+class, class variable, variable
+.\" Local Variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -89,10 +89,9 @@ have 59 or 61 seconds.
 .TP
 \fIunit\fR
 One of the words, \fBseconds\fR, \fBminutes\fR, \fBhours\fR,
-\fBdays\fR, \fBweeks\fR, \fBmonths\fR, or \fByears\fR, or
-any unique prefix of such a word. Used in conjunction with \fIcount\fR
-to identify an interval of time, for example, \fI3 seconds\fR or
-\fI1 year\fR.
+\fBdays\fR, \fBweekdays\fR, \fBweeks\fR, \fBmonths\fR, or \fByears\fR.
+Used in conjunction with \fIcount\fR to identify an interval of time,
+for example, \fI3 seconds\fR or \fI1 year\fR.
 .SS "OPTIONS"
 .TP
 \fB\-base\fR time
@@ -175,8 +174,7 @@ given as its first argument.  The remaining arguments (other than the
 possible \fB\-timezone\fR, \fB\-locale\fR and \fB\-gmt\fR options)
 are integers and keywords in alternation, where the keywords are chosen
 from \fBseconds\fR, \fBminutes\fR, \fBhours\fR,
-\fBdays\fR, \fBweeks\fR, \fBmonths\fR, or \fByears\fR, or
-any unique prefix of such a word.
+\fBdays\fR, \fBweekdays\fR, \fBweeks\fR, \fBmonths\fR, or \fByears\fR.
 .PP
 Addition of seconds, minutes and hours is fairly straightforward;
 the given time increment (times sixty for minutes, or 3600 for hours)
@@ -213,7 +211,8 @@ the given time to a calendar day and time of day in the appropriate
 time zone and locale.  The requisite number of days (weeks are converted
 to days by multiplying by seven) is added to the calendar day, and
 the date and time are then converted back to a count of seconds from
-the epoch time.
+the epoch time.  The \fBweekdays\fR keyword is similar to \fBdays\fR,
+with the only difference that weekends - Saturdays and Sundays - are skipped.
 .PP
 Adding and subtracting a given number of days across the point that
 the time changes at the start or end of summer time (Daylight Saving Time)
@@ -887,41 +886,47 @@ The \fIinputString\fR argument consists of zero or more specifications of the
 following form:
 .TP
 \fItime\fR
-A time of day, which is of the form: \fBhh?:mm?:ss?? ?meridian? ?zone?\fR
-or \fBhhmm ?meridian? ?zone?\fR
-If no meridian is specified, \fBhh\fR is interpreted on
+.
+A time of day, which is of the form:
+.QW "\fIhh\fR?\fB:\fImm\fR?\fB:\fIss\fR?? ?\fImeridian\fR? ?\fIzone\fR?"
+or
+.QW "\fBhhmm \fR?\fBmeridian\fR? ?\fBzone\fR?" .
+If no \fImeridian\fR is specified, \fIhh\fR is interpreted on
 a 24-hour clock.
 .TP
 \fIdate\fR
+.
 A specific month and day with optional year.  The
 acceptable formats are
-.QW "\fBmm/dd\fR?\fB/yy\fR?" ,
-.QW "\fBmonthname dd\fR?\fB, yy\fR?" ,
-.QW "\fBday, dd monthname \fR?\fByy\fR?" ,
-.QW "\fBdd monthname yy\fR" ,
-.QW "?\fBCC\fR?\fByymmdd\fR" ,
+.QW "\fImm\fB/\fIdd\fR?\fB/\fIyy\fR?" ,
+.QW "\fImonthname dd\fR?\fB, \fIyy\fR?" ,
+.QW "\fIday\fB, \fIdd monthname \fR?\fIyy\fR?" ,
+.QW "\fIdd monthname yy\fR" ,
+.QW "?\fICC\fR?\fIyymmdd\fR" ,
 and
-.QW "\fBdd-monthname-\fR?\fBCC\fR?\fByy\fR" .
+.QW "\fIdd\fB-\fImonthname\fB-\fR?\fICC\fR?\fIyy\fR" .
 The default year is the current year.  If the year is less
 than 100, we treat the years 00-68 as 2000-2068 and the years 69-99
 as 1969-1999.  Not all platforms can represent the years 38-70, so
 an error may result if these years are used.
 .TP
 \fIISO 8601 point-in-time\fR
+.
 An ISO 8601 point-in-time specification, such as
-.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhhmmss\fR,
+.QW "\fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhhmmss\fR",
 where \fBT\fR is the literal
 .QW T ,
 .QW "\fICCyymmdd hhmmss\fR" ,
-.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhh:mm:ss\fR ,
+.QW "\fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhh:mm:ss\fR" ,
 or
-.QW \fICCyy-mm-dd\fBT\fIhh:mm:ss\fR.
+.QW "\fICCyy-mm-dd\fBT\fIhh\fB:\fImm\fB:\fIss\fR".
 Note that only these four formats are accepted.
 The command does \fInot\fR accept the full range of point-in-time
 specifications specified in ISO8601.  Other formats can be recognized by
 giving an explicit \fB\-format\fR option to the \fBclock scan\fR command.
 .TP
 \fIrelative time\fR
+.
 A specification relative to the current time.  The format is \fBnumber
 unit\fR. Acceptable units are \fByear\fR, \fBfortnight\fR,
 \fBmonth\fR, \fBweek\fR, \fBday\fR,
@@ -49,16 +49,13 @@ When the last interpreter in which the channel is registered invokes
 .PP
 Channels are automatically closed when an interpreter is destroyed and
 when the process exits.
-.VS 8.6
 From 8.6 on (TIP#398), nonblocking channels are no longer switched to blocking mode when exiting; this guarantees a timely exit even when the peer or a communication channel is stalled. To ensure proper flushing of stalled nonblocking channels on exit, one must now either (a) actively switch them back to blocking or (b) use the environment variable TCL_FLUSH_NONBLOCKING_ON_EXIT,  which when set and not equal to "0" restores the previous behavior.
-.VE 8.6
 .PP
 The command returns an empty string, and may generate an error if
 an error occurs while flushing output.  If a command in a command
 pipeline created with \fBopen\fR returns an error, \fBclose\fR
 generates an error (similar to the \fBexec\fR command.)
 .PP
-.VS 8.6
 The two-argument form is a
 .QW "half-close" :
 given a bidirectional channel like a
@@ -80,7 +77,6 @@ abnormal exit error.
 .PP
 Currently only sockets and command pipelines support half-close. A future
 extension will allow reflected and stacked channels to do so.
-.VE 8.6
 .SH EXAMPLE
 .PP
 This illustrates how you can use Tcl to ensure that files get closed
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ exception to occur.
 The exception causes the current script to be aborted
 out to the innermost containing loop command, which then
 continues with the next iteration of the loop.
-Catch exceptions are also handled in a few other situations, such
+Continue exceptions are also handled in a few other situations, such
 as the \fBcatch\fR command and the outermost scripts of procedure
 bodies.
 .SH EXAMPLE
@@ -0,0 +1,217 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2014-2018 Donal K. Fellows.
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.TH "cookiejar" n 0.1 http "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.so man.macros
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+cookiejar \- Implementation of the Tcl http package cookie jar protocol
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fBpackage require\fR \fBcookiejar\fR ?\fB0.1\fR?
+
+\fB::http::cookiejar configure\fR ?\fIoptionName\fR? ?\fIoptionValue\fR?
+\fB::http::cookiejar create\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIfilename\fR?
+\fB::http::cookiejar new\fR ?\fIfilename\fR?
+
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBdestroy\fR
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBforceLoadDomainData\fR
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBgetCookies\fR \fIprotocol host path\fR
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBstoreCookie\fR \fIoptions\fR
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBlookup\fR ?\fIhost\fR? ?\fIkey\fR?
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The cookiejar package provides an implementation of the http package's cookie
+jar protocol using an SQLite database. It provides one main command,
+\fB::http::cookiejar\fR, which is a TclOO class that should be instantiated to
+create a cookie jar that manages a particular HTTP session.
+.PP
+The database management policy can be controlled at the package level by the
+\fBconfigure\fR method on the \fB::http::cookiejar\fR class object:
+.TP
+\fB::http::cookiejar configure\fR ?\fIoptionName\fR? ?\fIoptionValue\fR?
+.
+If neither \fIoptionName\fR nor \fIoptionValue\fR are supplied, this returns a
+copy of the configuration as a Tcl dictionary. If just \fIoptionName\fR is
+supplied, just the value of the named option is returned. If both
+\fIoptionName\fR and \fIoptionValue\fR are given, the named option is changed
+to be the given value.
+.RS
+.PP
+Supported options are:
+.TP
+\fB\-domainfile \fIfilename\fR
+.
+A file (defaulting to within the cookiejar package) with a description of the
+list of top-level domains (e.g., \fB.com\fR or \fB.co.jp\fR). Such domains
+\fImust not\fR accept cookies set upon them. Note that the list of such
+domains is both security-sensitive and \fInot\fR constant and should be
+periodically refetched. Cookie jars maintain their own cache of the domain
+list.
+.TP
+\fB\-domainlist \fIurl\fR
+.
+A URL to fetch the list of top-level domains (e.g., \fB.com\fR or
+\fB.co.jp\fR) from.  Such domains \fImust not\fR accept cookies set upon
+them. Note that the list of such domains is both security-sensitive and
+\fInot\fR constant and should be periodically refetched. Cookie jars maintain
+their own cache of the domain list.
+.TP
+\fB\-domainrefresh \fIintervalMilliseconds\fR
+.
+The number of milliseconds between checks of the \fI\-domainlist\fR for new
+domains.
+.TP
+\fB\-loglevel \fIlevel\fR
+.
+The logging level of this package. The logging level must be (in order of
+decreasing verbosity) one of \fBdebug\fR, \fBinfo\fR, \fBwarn\fR, or
+\fBerror\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-offline \fIflag\fR
+.
+Allows the cookie managment engine to be placed into offline mode. In offline
+mode, the list of domains is read immediately from the file configured in the
+\fB\-domainfile\fR option, and the \fB\-domainlist\fR option is not used; it
+also makes the \fB\-domainrefresh\fR option be effectively ignored.
+.TP
+\fB\-purgeold \fIintervalMilliseconds\fR
+.
+The number of milliseconds between checks of the database for expired
+cookies; expired cookies are deleted.
+.TP
+\fB\-retain \fIcookieCount\fR
+.
+The maximum number of cookies to retain in the database.
+.TP
+\fB\-vacuumtrigger \fIdeletionCount\fR
+.
+A count of the number of persistent cookie deletions to go between vacuuming
+the database.
+.RE
+.PP
+Cookie jar instances may be made with any of the standard TclOO instance
+creation methods (\fBcreate\fR or \fBnew\fR).
+.TP
+\fB::http::cookiejar new\fR ?\fIfilename\fR?
+.
+If a \fIfilename\fR argument is provided, it is the name of a file containing
+an SQLite database that will contain the persistent cookies maintained by the
+cookie jar; the database will be created if the file does not already
+exist. If \fIfilename\fR is not supplied, the database will be held entirely within
+memory, which effectively forces all cookies within it to be session cookies.
+.SS "INSTANCE METHODS"
+.PP
+The following methods are supported on the instances:
+.TP
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBdestroy\fR
+.
+This is the standard TclOO destruction method. It does \fInot\fR delete the
+SQLite database if it is written to disk. Callers are responsible for ensuring
+that the cookie jar is not in use by the http package at the time of
+destruction.
+.TP
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBforceLoadDomainData\fR
+.
+This method causes the cookie jar to immediately load (and cache) the domain
+list data. The domain list will be loaded from the \fB\-domainlist\fR
+configured a the package level if that is enabled, and otherwise will be
+obtained from the \fB\-domainfile\fR configured at the package level.
+.TP
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBgetCookies\fR \fIprotocol host path\fR
+.
+This method obtains the cookies for a particular HTTP request. \fIThis
+implements the http cookie jar protocol.\fR
+.TP
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBpolicyAllow\fR \fIoperation domain path\fR
+.
+This method is called by the \fBstoreCookie\fR method to get a decision on
+whether to allow \fIoperation\fR to be performed for the \fIdomain\fR and
+\fIpath\fR. This is checked immediately before the database is updated but
+after the built-in security checks are done, and should return a boolean
+value; if the value is false, the operation is rejected and the database is
+not modified. The supported \fIoperation\fRs are:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fBdelete\fR
+.
+The \fIdomain\fR is seeking to delete a cookie.
+.TP
+\fBsession\fR
+.
+The \fIdomain\fR is seeking to create or update a session cookie.
+.TP
+\fBset\fR
+.
+The \fIdomain\fR is seeking to create or update a persistent cookie (with a
+defined lifetime).
+.PP
+The default implementation of this method just returns true, but subclasses of
+this class may impose their own rules.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBstoreCookie\fR \fIoptions\fR
+.
+This method stores a single cookie from a particular HTTP response. Cookies
+that fail security checks are ignored. \fIThis implements the http cookie jar
+protocol.\fR
+.TP
+\fIcookiejar\fR \fBlookup\fR ?\fIhost\fR? ?\fIkey\fR?
+.
+This method looks a cookie by exact host (or domain) matching. If neither
+\fIhost\fR nor \fIkey\fR are supplied, the list of hosts for which a cookie is
+stored is returned. If just \fIhost\fR (which may be a hostname or a domain
+name) is supplied, the list of cookie keys stored for that host is returned.
+If both \fIhost\fR and \fIkey\fR are supplied, the value for that key is
+returned; it is an error if no such host or key match exactly.
+.SH "EXAMPLES"
+.PP
+The simplest way of using a cookie jar is to just permanently configure it at
+the start of the application.
+.PP
+.CS
+package require http
+\fBpackage require cookiejar\fR
+
+set cookiedb ~/.tclcookies.db
+http::configure -cookiejar [\fBhttp::cookiejar new\fR $cookiedb]
+
+# No further explicit steps are required to use cookies
+set tok [http::geturl http://core.tcl.tk/]
+.CE
+.PP
+To only allow a particular domain to use cookies, perhaps because you only
+want to enable a particular host to create and manipulate sessions, create a
+subclass that imposes that policy.
+.PP
+.CS
+package require http
+\fBpackage require cookiejar\fR
+
+oo::class create MyCookieJar {
+    superclass \fBhttp::cookiejar\fR
+
+    method \fBpolicyAllow\fR {operation domain path} {
+        return [expr {$domain eq "my.example.com"}]
+    }
+}
+
+set cookiedb ~/.tclcookies.db
+http::configure -cookiejar [MyCookieJar new $cookiedb]
+
+# No further explicit steps are required to use cookies
+set tok [http::geturl http://core.tcl.tk/]
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+http(n), oo::class(n), sqlite3(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+cookie, internet, security policy, www
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -9,15 +9,18 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-coroutine, yield, yieldto \- Create and produce values from coroutines
+coroutine, yield, yieldto, coroinject, coroprobe \- Create and produce values from coroutines
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fBcoroutine \fIname command\fR ?\fIarg...\fR?
 \fByield\fR ?\fIvalue\fR?
-.VS TIP396
 \fByieldto\fR \fIcommand\fR ?\fIarg...\fR?
 \fIname\fR ?\fIvalue...\fR?
-.VE TIP396
+.sp
+.VS "8.7, TIP383"
+\fBcoroinject \fIcoroName command\fR ?\fIarg...\fR?
+\fBcoroprobe \fIcoroName command\fR ?\fIarg...\fR?
+.VE "8.7, TIP383"
 .fi
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -39,7 +42,6 @@ the context to be suspended. If the coroutine context never yields and instead
 returns conventionally, the result of the \fBcoroutine\fR command will be the
 result of the evaluation of the context.
 .PP
-.VS TIP396
 The coroutine may also suspend its execution by use of the \fByieldto\fR
 command, which instead of returning, cedes execution to some command called
 \fIcommand\fR (resolved in the context of the coroutine) and to which \fIany
@@ -58,11 +60,10 @@ with multiple arguments is by using \fByieldto\fR and the \fBreturn\fR
 command, like this:
 .PP
 .CS
-proc yieldm {value} {
-    \fByieldto\fR return -level 0 $value
+proc yieldMultiple {value} {
+    tailcall \fByieldto\fR string cat $value
 }
 .CE
-.VE TIP396
 .PP
 The coroutine can also be deleted by destroying the command \fIname\fR, and
 the name of the current coroutine can be retrieved by using
@@ -75,6 +76,51 @@ At the point when \fIcommand\fR is called, the current namespace will be the
 global namespace and there will be no stack frames above it (in the sense of
 \fBupvar\fR and \fBuplevel\fR). However, which command to call will be
 determined in the namespace that the \fBcoroutine\fR command was called from.
+.PP
+.VS "8.7, TIP383"
+A suspended coroutine (i.e., one that has \fByield\fRed or \fByieldto\fR-d)
+may have its state inspected (or modified) at that point by using
+\fBcoroprobe\fR to run a command at the point where the coroutine is at. The
+command takes the name of the coroutine to run the command in, \fIcoroName\fR,
+and the name of a command (any any arguments it requires) to immediately run
+at that point. The result of that command is the result of the \fBcoroprobe\fR
+command, and the gross state of the coroutine remains the same afterwards
+(i.e., the coroutine is still expecting the results of a \fByield\fR or
+\fByieldto\fR as before) though variables may have been changed.
+.PP
+Similarly, the \fBcoroinject\fR command may be used to place a command to be
+run inside a suspended coroutine (when it is resumed) to process arguments,
+with quite a bit of similarity to \fBcoroprobe\fR. However, with
+\fBcoroinject\fR there are several key differences:
+.VE "8.7, TIP383"
+.IP \(bu
+.VS "8.7, TIP383"
+The coroutine is not immediately resumed after the injection has been done.  A
+consequence of this is that multiple injections may be done before the
+coroutine is resumed. There injected commands are performed in \fIreverse
+order of definition\fR (that is, they are internally stored on a stack).
+.VE "8.7, TIP383"
+.IP \(bu
+.VS "8.7, TIP383"
+An additional two arguments are appended to the list of arguments to be run
+(that is, the \fIcommand\fR and its \fIargs\fR are extended by two elements).
+The first is the name of the command that suspended the coroutine (\fByield\fR
+or \fByieldto\fR), and the second is the argument (or list of arguments, in
+the case of \fByieldto\fR) that is the current resumption value.
+.VE "8.7, TIP383"
+.IP \(bu
+.VS "8.7, TIP383"
+The result of the injected command is used as the result of the \fByield\fR or
+\fByieldto\fR that caused the coroutine to become suspended. Where there are
+multiple injected commands, the result of one becomes the resumption value
+processed by the next.
+.PP
+The injection is a one-off. It is not retained once it has been executed. It
+may \fByield\fR or \fByieldto\fR as part of its execution.
+.PP
+Note that running coroutines may be neither probed nor injected; the
+operations may only be applied to
+.VE "8.7, TIP383"
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
 This example shows a coroutine that will produce an infinite sequence of
@@ -138,7 +184,6 @@ for {set i 1} {$i <= 20} {incr i} {
 }
 .CE
 .PP
-.VS TIP396
 This example shows how a value can be passed around a group of three
 coroutines that yield to each other:
 .PP
@@ -150,14 +195,57 @@ proc juggler {name target {value ""}} {
    while {$value ne ""} {
        puts "$name : $value"
        set value [string range $value 0 end-1]
-        lassign [\fByieldto\fR $target $value] value
+        lassign [\fByieldto\fR \fI$target\fR $value] value
    }
 }
 \fBcoroutine\fR j1 juggler Larry [
    \fBcoroutine\fR j2 juggler Curly [
        \fBcoroutine\fR j3 juggler Moe j1]] "Nyuck!Nyuck!Nyuck!"
 .CE
-.VE TIP396
+.PP
+.VS "8.7, TIP383"
+This example shows a simple coroutine that collects non-empty values and
+returns a list of them when not given an argument. It also shows how we can
+look inside the coroutine to find out what it is doing, and how we can modify
+the input on a one-off basis.
+.PP
+.CS
+proc collectorImpl {} {
+    set me [info coroutine]
+    set accumulator {}
+    for {set val [\fByield\fR $me]} {$val ne ""} {set val [\fByield\fR]} {
+        lappend accumulator $val
+    }
+    return $accumulator
+}
+
+\fBcoroutine\fR collect collectorImpl
+\fIcollect\fR 123
+\fIcollect\fR "abc def"
+\fIcollect\fR 456
+
+puts [\fBcoroprobe \fIcollect\fR set accumulator]
+# ==> 123 {abc def} 456
+
+\fIcollect\fR "pqr"
+
+\fBcoroinject \fIcollect\fR apply {{type value} {
+    puts "Received '$value' at a $type in [info coroutine]"
+    return [string toupper $value]
+}}
+
+\fIcollect\fR rst
+# ==> Received 'rst' at a yield in ::collect
+\fIcollect\fR xyz
+
+puts [\fIcollect\fR]
+# ==> 123 {abc def} 456 pqr RST xyz
+.CE
+.PP
+This example shows a simple coroutine that collects non-empty values and
+returns a list of them when not given an argument. It also shows how we can
+look inside the coroutine to find out what it is doing.
+.VE "8.7, TIP383"
 .SS "DETAILED SEMANTICS"
 .PP
 This example demonstrates that coroutines start from the global namespace, and
@@ -17,11 +17,9 @@ dde \- Execute a Dynamic Data Exchange command
 .sp
 \fBdde servername\fR ?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-handler \fIproc\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fItopic\fR?
 .sp
-.VS 8.6
 \fBdde execute\fR ?\fB\-async\fR? ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic data\fR
 .sp
 \fBdde poke\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic item data\fR
-.VE 8.6
 .sp
 \fBdde request\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic item\fR
 .sp
@@ -82,13 +80,11 @@ script is run in the application.  The \fB\-async\fR option requests
 asynchronous invocation.  The command returns an error message if the
 script did not run, unless the \fB\-async\fR flag was used, in which case
 the command returns immediately with no error.
-.VS 8.6
 Without the \fB\-binary\fR option all data will be sent in unicode. For
 dde clients which don't implement the CF_UNICODE clipboard format, this
 will automatically be translated to the system encoding. You can use
 the \fB\-binary\fR option in combination with the result of
 \fBencoding convertto\fR to send data in any other encoding.
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBdde poke\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic item data\fR
 .
@@ -99,13 +95,11 @@ specific but can be a command to the server or the name of a file to work
 on.  The \fIitem\fR is also application specific and is often not used, but
 it must always be non-null.  The \fIdata\fR field is given to the remote
 application.
-.VS 8.6
 Without the \fB\-binary\fR option all data will be sent in unicode. For
 dde clients which don't implement the CF_UNICODE clipboard format, this
 will automatically be translated to the system encoding. You can use
 the \fB\-binary\fR option in combination with the result of
 \fBencoding convertto\fR to send data in any other encoding.
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBdde request\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic item\fR
 .
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2007 Donal K. Fellows
+'\" Copyright (c) 2007-2018 Donal K. Fellows
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -34,11 +34,36 @@ either the \fIdefScript\fR argument or by the \fIsubcommand\fR and following
 \fIarg\fR arguments; when the second is present, it is exactly as if all the
 arguments from \fIsubcommand\fR onwards are made into a list and that list is
 used as the \fIdefScript\fR argument.
-.SS "CONFIGURING CLASSES"
+.PP
+Note that the constructor for \fBoo::class\fR will call \fBoo::define\fR on
+the script argument that it is provided. This is a convenient way to create
+and define a class in one step.
+.SH "CONFIGURING CLASSES"
 .PP
 The following commands are supported in the \fIdefScript\fR for
 \fBoo::define\fR, each of which may also be used in the \fIsubcommand\fR form:
 .TP
+\fBclassmethod\fI name\fR ?\fIargList bodyScrip\fR?
+.VS TIP478
+This creates a class method, or (if \fIargList\fR and \fIbodyScript\fR are
+omitted) promotes an existing method on the class object to be a class
+method. The \fIname\fR, \fIargList\fR and \fIbodyScript\fR arguments are as in
+the \fBmethod\fR definition, below.
+.RS
+.PP
+Class methods can be called on either the class itself or on the instances of
+that class. When they are called, the current object (see the \fBsel\fR and
+\fBmy\fR commands) is the class on which they are called or the class of the
+instance on which they are called, depending on whether they are called on the
+class or an instance of the class, respectively. If called on a subclass or
+instance of the subclass, the current object is the subclass.
+.PP
+In a private definition context, the methods as invoked on classes are
+\fInot\fR private, but the methods as invoked on instances of classes are
+private.
+.RE
+.VE TIP478
+.TP
 \fBconstructor\fI argList bodyScript\fR
 .
 This creates or updates the constructor for a class. The formal arguments to
@@ -49,14 +74,11 @@ namespace of the constructor will be a namespace that is unique to the object
 being constructed. Within the constructor, the \fBnext\fR command should be
 used to call the superclasses' constructors. If \fIbodyScript\fR is the empty
 string, the constructor will be deleted.
-.TP
-\fBdeletemethod\fI name\fR ?\fIname ...\fR?
-.
-This deletes each of the methods called \fIname\fR from a class. The methods
-must have previously existed in that class. Does not affect the superclasses
-of the class, nor does it affect the subclasses or instances of the class
-(except when they have a call chain through the class being modified) or the
-class object itself.
+.RS
+.PP
+Classes do not need to have a constructor defined. If none is specified, the
+superclass's constructor will be used instead.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBdestructor\fI bodyScript\fR
 .
@@ -82,19 +104,6 @@ class being defined. Note that the methods themselves may be actually defined
 by a superclass; subclass exports override superclass visibility, and may in
 turn be overridden by instances.
 .TP
-\fBfilter\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fImethodName ...\fR?
-.VS
-This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
-.VE
-sets or updates the list of method names that are used to guard whether
-method call to instances of the class may be called and what the method's
-results are. Each \fImethodName\fR names a single filtering method (which may
-be exposed or not exposed); it is not an error for a non-existent method to be
-named since they may be defined by subclasses.
-.VS
-By default, this slot works by appending.
-.VE
-.TP
 \fBforward\fI name cmdName \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
 .
 This creates or updates a forwarded method called \fIname\fR. The method is
@@ -106,8 +115,24 @@ fully-qualified, the command will be searched for in each object's namespace,
 using the instances' namespace's path, or by looking in the global namespace.
 The method will be exported if \fIname\fR starts with a lower-case letter, and
 non-exported otherwise.
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below), this command creates private forwarded methods.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
 .TP
-\fBmethod\fI name argList bodyScript\fR
+\fBinitialise\fI script\fR
+.TP
+\fBinitialize\fI script\fR
+.VS TIP478
+This evaluates \fIscript\fR in a context which supports local variables and
+where the current namespace is the instance namespace of the class object
+itself. This is useful for setting up, e.g., class-scoped variables.
+.VE TIP478
+.TP
+\fBmethod\fI name \fR?\fIoption\fR? \fIargList bodyScript\fR
 .
 This creates or updates a method that is implemented as a procedure-like
 script. The name of the method is \fIname\fR, the formal arguments to the
@@ -117,33 +142,44 @@ the body of the method is evaluated, the current namespace of the method will
 be a namespace that is unique to the current object. The method will be
 exported if \fIname\fR starts with a lower-case letter, and non-exported
 otherwise; this behavior can be overridden via \fBexport\fR and
-\fBunexport\fR.
+\fBunexport\fR
+.VS  TIP519
+or by specifying \fB\-export\fR, \fB\-private\fR or \fB\-unexport\fR in the
+optional parameter \fIoption\fR.
+.VE TIP519
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below) or if the \fB\-private\fR flag is given for \fIoption\fR, this command
+creates private procedure-like methods.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
 .TP
-\fBmixin\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIclassName ...\fR?
-.VS
-This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
-.VE
-sets or updates the list of additional classes that are to be mixed into
-all the instances of the class being defined. Each \fIclassName\fR argument
-names a single class that is to be mixed in.
-.VS
-By default, this slot works by replacement.
-.VE
+\fBprivate \fIcmd arg...\fR
 .TP
-\fBrenamemethod\fI fromName toName\fR
+\fBprivate \fIscript\fR
 .
-This renames the method called \fIfromName\fR in a class to \fItoName\fR. The
-method must have previously existed in the class, and \fItoName\fR must not
-previously refer to a method in that class. Does not affect the superclasses
-of the class, nor does it affect the subclasses or instances of the class
-(except when they have a call chain through the class being modified), or the
-class object itself. Does
-not change the export status of the method; if it was exported before, it will
-be afterwards.
+.VS TIP500
+This evaluates the \fIscript\fR (or the list of command and arguments given by
+\fIcmd\fR and \fIarg\fRs) in a context where the definitions made on the
+current class will be private definitions.
+.RS
+.PP
+The following class definition commands are affected by \fBprivate\fR:
+\fBforward\fR, \fBmethod\fR, \fBself\fR, and \fBvariable\fR. Nesting
+\fBprivate\fR inside \fBprivate\fR has no cumulative effect; the innermost
+definition context is just a private definition context. All other definition
+commands have no difference in behavior when used in a private definition
+context.
+.RE
+.VE TIP500
 .TP
 \fBself\fI subcommand arg ...\fR
 .TP
 \fBself\fI script\fR
+.TP
+\fBself\fR
 .
 This command is equivalent to calling \fBoo::objdefine\fR on the class being
 defined (see \fBCONFIGURING OBJECTS\fR below for a description of the
@@ -153,20 +189,29 @@ and
 .QW "\fBoo::define \fIcls \fBself \fIsubcommand ...\fR"
 operates identically to
 .QW "\fBoo::objdefine \fIcls subcommand ...\fR" .
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP470
+If no arguments at all are used, this gives the name of the class currently
+being configured.
+.VE TIP470
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below), the definitions on the class object will also be made in a private
+definition context.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBsuperclass\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIclassName ...\fR?
-.VS
+.
 This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
-.VE
 allows the alteration of the superclasses of the class being defined.
 Each \fIclassName\fR argument names one class that is to be a superclass of
 the defined class. Note that objects must not be changed from being classes to
 being non-classes or vice-versa, that an empty parent class is equivalent to
 \fBoo::object\fR, and that the parent classes of \fBoo::object\fR and
 \fBoo::class\fR may not be modified.
-.VS
 By default, this slot works by replacement.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBunexport\fI name \fR?\fIname ...\fR?
 .
@@ -178,24 +223,212 @@ actually defined by a superclass; subclass unexports override superclass
 visibility, and may be overridden by instance unexports.
 .TP
 \fBvariable\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIname ...\fR?
-.VS
+.
 This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below) arranges for each of the named
 variables to be automatically made
 available in the methods, constructor and destructor declared by the class
 being defined. Each variable name must not have any namespace
 separators and must not look like an array access. All variables will be
-actually present in the instance object on which the method is executed. Note
+actually present in the namespace of the instance object on which the method
+is executed. Note
 that the variable lists declared by a superclass or subclass are completely
 disjoint, as are variable lists declared by instances; the list of variable
 names is just for methods (and constructors and destructors) declared by this
 class. By default, this slot works by appending.
-.VE
-.SS "CONFIGURING OBJECTS"
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below), this slot manipulates the list of private variable bindings for this
+class. In a private variable binding, the name of the variable within the
+instance object is different to the name given in the definition; the name
+used in the definition is the name that you use to access the variable within
+the methods of this class, and the name of the variable in the instance
+namespace has a unique prefix that makes accidental use from other classes
+extremely unlikely.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
+.SS "ADVANCED CLASS CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
+.PP
+The following definitions are also supported, but are not required in simple
+programs:
+.TP
+\fBdefinitionnamespace\fR ?\fIkind\fR? \fInamespaceName\fR
+.VS TIP524
+This allows control over what namespace will be used by the \fBoo::define\fR
+and \fBoo::objdefine\fR commands to look up the definition commands they
+use. When any object has a definition operation applied to it, \fIthe class that
+it is an instance of\fR (and its superclasses and mixins) is consulted for
+what definition namespace to use. \fBoo::define\fR gets the class definition
+namespace, and \fB::oo::objdefine\fR gets the instance definition namespace,
+but both otherwise use the identical lookup operation.
+.RS
+.PP
+This sets the definition namespace of kind \fIkind\fR provided by the current
+class to \fInamespaceName\fR. The \fInamespaceName\fR must refer to a
+currently existing namespace, or must be the empty string (to stop the current
+class from having such a namespace connected). The \fIkind\fR, if supplied,
+must be either \fB\-class\fR (the default) or \fB\-instance\fR to specify the
+whether the namespace for use with \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR
+respectively is being set.
+.PP
+The class \fBoo::object\fR has its instance namespace locked to
+\fB::oo::objdefine\fR, and the class \fBoo::class\fR has its class namespace
+locked to \fB::oo::define\fR. A consequence of this is that effective use of
+this feature for classes requires the definition of a metaclass.
+.RE
+.VE TIP524
+.TP
+\fBdeletemethod\fI name\fR ?\fIname ...\fR?
+.
+This deletes each of the methods called \fIname\fR from a class. The methods
+must have previously existed in that class. Does not affect the superclasses
+of the class, nor does it affect the subclasses or instances of the class
+(except when they have a call chain through the class being modified) or the
+class object itself.
+.TP
+\fBfilter\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fImethodName ...\fR?
+.
+This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
+sets or updates the list of method names that are used to guard whether
+method call to instances of the class may be called and what the method's
+results are. Each \fImethodName\fR names a single filtering method (which may
+be exposed or not exposed); it is not an error for a non-existent method to be
+named since they may be defined by subclasses.
+By default, this slot works by appending.
+.TP
+\fBmixin\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIclassName ...\fR?
+.
+This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
+sets or updates the list of additional classes that are to be mixed into
+all the instances of the class being defined. Each \fIclassName\fR argument
+names a single class that is to be mixed in.
+By default, this slot works by replacement.
+.TP
+\fBrenamemethod\fI fromName toName\fR
+.
+This renames the method called \fIfromName\fR in a class to \fItoName\fR. The
+method must have previously existed in the class, and \fItoName\fR must not
+previously refer to a method in that class. Does not affect the superclasses
+of the class, nor does it affect the subclasses or instances of the class
+(except when they have a call chain through the class being modified), or the
+class object itself. Does
+not change the export status of the method; if it was exported before, it will
+be afterwards.
+.SH "CONFIGURING OBJECTS"
 .PP
 The following commands are supported in the \fIdefScript\fR for
 \fBoo::objdefine\fR, each of which may also be used in the \fIsubcommand\fR
 form:
 .TP
+\fBexport\fI name \fR?\fIname ...\fR?
+.
+This arranges for each of the named methods, \fIname\fR, to be exported
+(i.e. usable outside the object through the object's command) by the object
+being defined. Note that the methods themselves may be actually defined by a
+class or superclass; object exports override class visibility.
+.TP
+\fBforward\fI name cmdName \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
+.
+This creates or updates a forwarded object method called \fIname\fR. The
+method is defined be forwarded to the command called \fIcmdName\fR, with
+additional arguments, \fIarg\fR etc., added before those arguments specified
+by the caller of the method. Forwarded methods should be deleted using the
+\fBmethod\fR subcommand. The method will be exported if \fIname\fR starts with
+a lower-case letter, and non-exported otherwise.
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below), this command creates private forwarded methods.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBmethod\fI name \fR?\fIoption\fR? \fIargList bodyScript\fR
+.
+This creates, updates or deletes an object method. The name of the method is
+\fIname\fR, the formal arguments to the method (defined using the same format
+as for the Tcl \fBproc\fR command) will be \fIargList\fR, and the body of the
+method will be \fIbodyScript\fR. When the body of the method is evaluated, the
+current namespace of the method will be a namespace that is unique to the
+object. The method will be exported if \fIname\fR starts with a lower-case
+letter, and non-exported otherwise;
+.VS  TIP519
+this can be overridden by specifying \fB\-export\fR, \fB\-private\fR or
+\fB\-unexport\fR in the optional parameter \fIoption\fR, or via the
+\fBexport\fR and \fBunexport\fR definitions.
+.VE TIP519
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below) or if the \fB\-private\fR flag is given for \fIoption\fR, this command
+creates private procedure-like methods.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBmixin\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIclassName ...\fR?
+.
+This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
+sets or updates a per-object list of additional classes that are to be
+mixed into the object. Each argument, \fIclassName\fR, names a single class
+that is to be mixed in.
+By default, this slot works by replacement.
+.TP
+\fBprivate \fIcmd arg...\fR
+.TP
+\fBprivate \fIscript\fR
+.VS TIP500
+This evaluates the \fIscript\fR (or the list of command and arguments given by
+\fIcmd\fR and \fIarg\fRs) in a context where the definitions made on the
+current object will be private definitions.
+.RS
+.PP
+The following class definition commands are affected by \fBprivate\fR:
+\fBforward\fR, \fBmethod\fR, and \fBvariable\fR. Nesting \fBprivate\fR inside
+\fBprivate\fR has no cumulative effect; the innermost definition context is
+just a private definition context. All other definition commands have no
+difference in behavior when used in a private definition context.
+.RE
+.VE TIP500
+.TP
+\fBunexport\fI name \fR?\fIname ...\fR?
+.
+This arranges for each of the named methods, \fIname\fR, to be not exported
+(i.e. not usable outside the object through the object's command, but instead
+just through the \fBmy\fR command visible in the object's context) by the
+object being defined. Note that the methods themselves may be actually defined
+by a class; instance unexports override class visibility.
+.TP
+\fBvariable\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIname ...\fR?
+.
+This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below) arranges for each of the named
+variables to be automatically made available in the methods declared by the
+object being defined.  Each variable name must not have any namespace
+separators and must not look like an array access. All variables will be
+actually present in the namespace of the object on which the method is
+executed. Note that the
+variable lists declared by the classes and mixins of which the object is an
+instance are completely disjoint; the list of variable names is just for
+methods declared by this object. By default, this slot works by appending.
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP500
+If in a private definition context (see the \fBprivate\fR definition command,
+below), this slot manipulates the list of private variable bindings for this
+object.  In a private variable binding, the name of the variable within the
+instance object is different to the name given in the definition; the name
+used in the definition is the name that you use to access the variable within
+the methods of this instance object, and the name of the variable in the
+instance namespace has a unique prefix that makes accidental use from
+superclass methods extremely unlikely.
+.VE TIP500
+.RE
+.SS "ADVANCED OBJECT CONFIGURATION OPTIONS"
+.PP
+The following definitions are also supported, but are not required in simple
+programs:
+.TP
 \fBclass\fI className\fR
 .
 This allows the class of an object to be changed after creation. Note that the
@@ -210,56 +443,16 @@ through \fBoo::objdefine method\fR). Does not affect the classes that the
 object is an instance of, or remove the exposure of those class-provided
 methods in the instance of that class.
 .TP
-\fBexport\fI name \fR?\fIname ...\fR?
-.
-This arranges for each of the named methods, \fIname\fR, to be exported
-(i.e. usable outside the object through the object's command) by the object
-being defined. Note that the methods themselves may be actually defined by a
-class or superclass; object exports override class visibility.
-.TP
 \fBfilter\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fImethodName ...\fR?
-.VS
+.
 This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
-.VE
 sets or updates the list of method names that are used to guard whether a
 method call to the object may be called and what the method's results are.
 Each \fImethodName\fR names a single filtering method (which may be exposed or
 not exposed); it is not an error for a non-existent method to be named. Note
 that the actual list of filters also depends on the filters set upon any
 classes that the object is an instance of.
-.VS
 By default, this slot works by appending.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBforward\fI name cmdName \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
-.
-This creates or updates a forwarded object method called \fIname\fR. The
-method is defined be forwarded to the command called \fIcmdName\fR, with
-additional arguments, \fIarg\fR etc., added before those arguments specified
-by the caller of the method. Forwarded methods should be deleted using the
-\fBmethod\fR subcommand. The method will be exported if \fIname\fR starts with
-a lower-case letter, and non-exported otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBmethod\fI name argList bodyScript\fR
-.
-This creates, updates or deletes an object method. The name of the method is
-\fIname\fR, the formal arguments to the method (defined using the same format
-as for the Tcl \fBproc\fR command) will be \fIargList\fR, and the body of the
-method will be \fIbodyScript\fR. When the body of the method is evaluated, the
-current namespace of the method will be a namespace that is unique to the
-object. The method will be exported if \fIname\fR starts with a lower-case
-letter, and non-exported otherwise.
-.TP
-\fBmixin\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIclassName ...\fR?
-.VS
-This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below)
-.VE
-sets or updates a per-object list of additional classes that are to be
-mixed into the object. Each argument, \fIclassName\fR, names a single class
-that is to be mixed in.
-.VS
-By default, this slot works by replacement.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBrenamemethod\fI fromName toName\fR
 .
@@ -271,45 +464,51 @@ methods provided by those classes (though a \fBoo::objdefine forward\fRed
 method may provide an equivalent capability). Does not change the export
 status of the method; if it was exported before, it will be afterwards.
 .TP
-\fBunexport\fI name \fR?\fIname ...\fR?
-.
-This arranges for each of the named methods, \fIname\fR, to be not exported
-(i.e. not usable outside the object through the object's command, but instead
-just through the \fBmy\fR command visible in the object's context) by the
-object being defined. Note that the methods themselves may be actually defined
-by a class; instance unexports override class visibility.
-.TP
-\fBvariable\fR ?\fI\-slotOperation\fR? ?\fIname ...\fR?
-.VS
-This slot (see \fBSLOTTED DEFINITIONS\fR below) arranges for each of the named
-variables to be automatically made available in the methods declared by the
-object being defined.  Each variable name must not have any namespace
-separators and must not look like an array access. All variables will be
-actually present in the object on which the method is executed. Note that the
-variable lists declared by the classes and mixins of which the object is an
-instance are completely disjoint; the list of variable names is just for
-methods declared by this object. By default, this slot works by appending.
+\fBself \fR
+.VS TIP470
+This gives the name of the object currently being configured.
+.VE TIP470
+.SH "PRIVATE METHODS"
+.VS TIP500
+When a class or instance has a private method, that private method can only be
+invoked from within methods of that class or instance. Other callers of the
+object's methods \fIcannot\fR invoke private methods, it is as if the private
+methods do not exist. However, a private method of a class \fIcan\fR be
+invoked from the class's methods when those methods are being used on another
+instance object; this means that a class can use them to coordinate behaviour
+between several instances of itself without interfering with how other
+classes (especially either subclasses or superclasses) interact. Private
+methods precede all mixed in classes in the method call order (as reported by
+\fBself call\fR).
+.VE TIP500
 .SH "SLOTTED DEFINITIONS"
 Some of the configurable definitions of a class or object are \fIslotted
 definitions\fR. This means that the configuration is implemented by a slot
 object, that is an instance of the class \fBoo::Slot\fR, which manages a list
 of values (class names, variable names, etc.) that comprises the contents of
-the slot. The class defines three operations (as methods) that may be done on
+the slot. The class defines five operations (as methods) that may be done on
 the slot:
-.VE
 .TP
 \fIslot\fR \fB\-append\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
-.VS
+.
 This appends the given \fImember\fR elements to the slot definition.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fIslot\fR \fB\-clear\fR
-.VS
+.
 This sets the slot definition to the empty list.
-.VE
+.TP
+\fIslot\fR \fB\-prepend\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
+.VS TIP516
+This prepends the given \fImember\fR elements to the slot definition.
+.VE TIP516
+.TP
+\fIslot\fR \fB\-remove\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
+.VS TIP516
+This removes the given \fImember\fR elements from the slot definition.
+.VE TIP516
 .TP
 \fIslot\fR \fB\-set\fR ?\fImember ...\fR?
-.VS
+.
 This replaces the slot definition with the given \fImember\fR elements.
 .PP
 A consequence of this is that any use of a slot's default operation where the
@@ -322,20 +521,55 @@ which is forwarded to the default operation of the slot (thus, for the class
 slot, this is forwarded to
 .QW "\fBmy \-append\fR" ),
 and these methods which provide the implementation interface:
-.VE
 .TP
 \fIslot\fR \fBGet\fR
-.VS
-Returns a list that is the current contents of the slot. This method must
-always be called from a stack frame created by a call to \fBoo::define\fR or
-\fBoo::objdefine\fR.
-.VE
+.
+Returns a list that is the current contents of the slot, but does not modify
+the slot. This method must always be called from a stack frame created by a
+call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR. This method \fIshould not\fR
+return an error unless it is called from outside a definition context or with
+the wrong number of arguments.
+.RS
+.PP
+.VS TIP516
+The elements of the list should be fully resolved, if that is a meaningful
+concept to the slot.
+.VE TIP516
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIslot\fR \fBResolve\fR \fIslotElement\fR
+.VS TIP516
+Returns \fIslotElement\fR with a resolution operation applied to it, but does
+not modify the slot. For slots of simple strings, this is an operation that
+does nothing, whereas for slots of classes, this maps a class name to its
+fully-qualified class name.  This method must always be called from a stack
+frame created by a call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR.  This
+method \fIshould not\fR return an error unless it is called from outside a
+definition context or with the wrong number of arguments; unresolvable
+arguments should be returned as is (as not all slot operations strictly
+require that values are resolvable to work).
+.RS
+.PP
+Implementations \fIshould not\fR enforce uniqueness and ordering constraints
+in this method; that is the responsibility of the \fBSet\fR method.
+.RE
+.VE TIP516
 .TP
 \fIslot\fR \fBSet \fIelementList\fR
-.VS
+.
 Sets the contents of the slot to the list \fIelementList\fR and returns the
 empty string. This method must always be called from a stack frame created by
-a call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR.
+a call to \fBoo::define\fR or \fBoo::objdefine\fR. This method may return an
+error if it rejects the change to the slot contents (e.g., because of invalid
+values) as well as if it is called from outside a definition context or with
+the wrong number of arguments.
+.RS
+.PP
+This method \fImay\fR reorder and filter the elements if this is necessary in
+order to satisfy the underlying constraints of the slot. (For example, slots
+of classes enforce a uniqueness constraint that places each element in the
+earliest location in the slot that it can.)
+.RE
 .PP
 The implementation of these methods is slot-dependent (and responsible for
 accessing the correct part of the class or object definition). Slots also have
@@ -343,7 +577,14 @@ an unknown method handler to tie all these pieces together, and they hide
 their \fBdestroy\fR method so that it is not invoked inadvertently. It is
 \fIrecommended\fR that any user changes to the slot mechanism be restricted to
 defining new operations whose names start with a hyphen.
-.VE
+.PP
+.VS TIP516
+Most slot operations will initially \fBResolve\fR their argument list, combine
+it with the results of the \fBGet\fR method, and then \fBSet\fR the result.
+Some operations omit one or both of the first two steps; omitting the third
+would result in an idempotent read-only operation (but the standard mechanism
+for reading from slots is via \fBinfo class\fR and \fBinfo object\fR).
+.VE TIP516
 .SH EXAMPLES
 This example demonstrates how to use both forms of the \fBoo::define\fR and
 \fBoo::objdefine\fR commands (they work in the same way), as well as
@@ -400,6 +641,138 @@ oo::class create B {
 inst m1              \fI\(-> prints "red brick"\fR
 inst m2              \fI\(-> prints "blue brick"\fR
 .CE
+.PP
+.VS TIP478
+This example shows how to create and use class variables. It is a class that
+counts how many instances of itself have been made.
+.PP
+.CS
+oo::class create Counted
+\fBoo::define\fR Counted {
+    \fBinitialise\fR {
+        variable count 0
+    }
+
+    \fBvariable\fR number
+    \fBconstructor\fR {} {
+        classvariable count
+        set number [incr count]
+    }
+
+    \fBmethod\fR report {} {
+        classvariable count
+        puts "This is instance $number of $count"
+    }
+}
+
+set a [Counted new]
+set b [Counted new]
+$a report
+        \fI\(-> This is instance 1 of 2\fR
+set c [Counted new]
+$b report
+        \fI\(-> This is instance 2 of 3\fR
+$c report
+        \fI\(-> This is instance 3 of 3\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+This example demonstrates how to use class methods. (Note that the constructor
+for \fBoo::class\fR calls \fBoo::define\fR on the class.)
+.PP
+.CS
+oo::class create DBTable {
+    \fBclassmethod\fR find {description} {
+        puts "DB: locate row from [self] matching $description"
+        return [my new]
+    }
+    \fBclassmethod\fR insert {description} {
+        puts "DB: create row in [self] matching $description"
+        return [my new]
+    }
+    \fBmethod\fR update {description} {
+        puts "DB: update row [self] with $description"
+    }
+    \fBmethod\fR delete {} {
+        puts "DB: delete row [self]"
+        my destroy; # Just delete the object, not the DB row
+    }
+}
+
+oo::class create Users {
+    \fBsuperclass\fR DBTable
+}
+oo::class create Groups {
+    \fBsuperclass\fR DBTable
+}
+
+set u1 [Users insert "username=abc"]
+        \fI\(-> DB: create row from ::Users matching username=abc\fR
+set u2 [Users insert "username=def"]
+        \fI\(-> DB: create row from ::Users matching username=def\fR
+$u2 update "group=NULL"
+        \fI\(-> DB: update row ::oo::Obj124 with group=NULL\fR
+$u1 delete
+        \fI\(-> DB: delete row ::oo::Obj123\fR
+set g [Group find "groupname=webadmins"]
+        \fI\(-> DB: locate row ::Group with groupname=webadmins\fR
+$g update "emailaddress=admins"
+        \fI\(-> DB: update row ::oo::Obj125 with emailaddress=admins\fR
+.CE
+.VE TIP478
+.PP
+.VS TIP524
+This example shows how to make a custom definition for a class. Note that it
+explicitly includes delegation to the existing definition commands via
+\fBnamespace path\fR.
+.PP
+.CS
+namespace eval myDefinitions {
+    # Delegate to existing definitions where not overridden
+    namespace path \fB::oo::define\fR
+
+    # A custom type of method
+    proc exprmethod {name arguments body} {
+        tailcall \fBmethod\fR $name $arguments [list expr $body]
+    }
+
+    # A custom way of building a constructor
+    proc parameters args {
+        uplevel 1 [list \fBvariable\fR {*}$args]
+        set body [join [lmap a $args {
+            string map [list VAR $a] {
+                set [my varname VAR] [expr {double($VAR)}]
+            }
+        }] ";"]
+        tailcall \fBconstructor\fR $args $body
+    }
+}
+
+# Bind the namespace into a (very simple) metaclass for use
+oo::class create exprclass {
+    \fBsuperclass\fR oo::class
+    \fBdefinitionnamespace\fR myDefinitions
+}
+
+# Use the custom definitions
+exprclass create quadratic {
+    parameters a b c
+    exprmethod evaluate {x} {
+        ($a * $x**2) + ($b * $x) + $c
+    }
+}
+
+# Showing the resulting class and object in action
+quadratic create quad 1 2 3
+for {set x 0} {$x <= 4} {incr x} {
+    puts [format "quad(%d) = %.2f" $x [quad evaluate $x]]
+}
+        \fI\(-> quad(0) = 3.00\fR
+        \fI\(-> quad(1) = 6.00\fR
+        \fI\(-> quad(2) = 11.00\fR
+        \fI\(-> quad(3) = 18.00\fR
+        \fI\(-> quad(4) = 27.00\fR
+.CE
+.VE TIP524
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 next(n), oo::class(n), oo::object(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
@@ -27,6 +27,11 @@ key maps to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable,
 writing the resulting dictionary value back to that variable.
 Non-existent keys are treated as if they map to an empty string. The
 updated dictionary value is returned.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the appending operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .TP
 \fBdict create \fR?\fIkey value ...\fR?
 .
@@ -49,10 +54,8 @@ type (which may be abbreviated.)  Supported filter types are:
 .RS
 .TP
 \fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue \fBkey\fR ?\fIglobPattern ...\fR?
-.VS 8.6
 The key rule only matches those key/value pairs whose keys match any
 of the given patterns (in the style of \fBstring match\fR.)
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue \fBscript {\fIkeyVariable valueVariable\fB} \fIscript\fR
 .
@@ -69,10 +72,8 @@ result. The key/value pairs are tested in the order in which the keys
 were inserted into the dictionary.
 .TP
 \fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue \fBvalue \fR?\fIglobPattern ...\fR?
-.VS 8.6
 The value rule only matches those key/value pairs whose values match any
 of the given patterns (in the style of \fBstring match\fR.)
-.VE 8.6
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBdict for {\fIkeyVariable valueVariable\fB} \fIdictionaryValue body\fR
@@ -115,6 +116,22 @@ It is an error to attempt to retrieve a value for a key that is not
 present in the dictionary.
 .RE
 .TP
+\fBdict getdef \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIkey ...\fR? \fIkey default\fR
+.TP
+\fBdict getwithdefault \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIkey ...\fR? \fIkey default\fR
+.VS "8.7, TIP342"
+This behaves the same as \fBdict get\fR (with at least one \fIkey\fR
+argument), returning the value that the key path maps to in the
+dictionary \fIdictionaryValue\fR, except that instead of producing an
+error because the \fIkey\fR (or one of the \fIkey\fRs on the key path)
+is absent, it returns the \fIdefault\fR argument instead.
+.RS
+.PP
+Note that there must always be at least one \fIkey\fR provided, and that
+\fBdict getdef\fR and \fBdict getwithdefault\fR are aliases for each other.
+.RE
+.VE "8.7, TIP342"
+.TP
 \fBdict incr \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIincrement\fR?
 .
 This adds the given increment value (an integer that defaults to 1 if
@@ -124,6 +141,11 @@ resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent keys
 are treated as if they map to 0. It is an error to increment a value
 for an existing key if that value is not an integer. The updated
 dictionary value is returned.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the incrementing operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .TP
 \fBdict info \fIdictionaryValue\fR
 .
@@ -149,6 +171,11 @@ keys are treated as if they map to an empty list, and it is legal for
 there to be no items to append to the list. It is an error for the
 value that the key maps to to not be representable as a list. The
 updated dictionary value is returned.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the list-appending operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .TP
 \fBdict map \fR{\fIkeyVariable valueVariable\fR} \fIdictionaryValue body\fR
 .
@@ -206,6 +233,11 @@ value and places an updated dictionary value in that variable
 containing a mapping from the given key to the given value. When
 multiple keys are present, this operation creates or updates a chain
 of nested dictionaries. The updated dictionary value is returned.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the value insert/update operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .TP
 \fBdict size \fIdictionaryValue\fR
 .
@@ -221,6 +253,11 @@ through nested dictionaries to the mapping to remove. At least one key
 must be specified, but the last key on the key-path need not exist.
 All other components on the path must exist. The updated dictionary
 value is returned.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the value remove operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .TP
 \fBdict update \fIdictionaryVariable key varName \fR?\fIkey varName ...\fR? \fIbody\fR
 .
@@ -236,6 +273,11 @@ are silently discarded), even if the result of \fIbody\fR is an error
 or some other kind of exceptional exit. The result of \fBdict
 update\fR is (unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the
 evaluation of \fIbody\fR.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the update operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .RS
 .PP
 Each \fIvarName\fR is mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict update\fR;
@@ -270,6 +312,11 @@ dictionary be discarded, and this also happens if the contents of
 dictionaries no longer exists. The result of \fBdict with\fR is
 (unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the evaluation of
 \fIbody\fR.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIdictionaryVariable\fR indicates an element that does not exist of an
+array that has a default value set, the default value and will be used as the
+value of the dictionary prior to the updating operation.
+.VE TIP508
 .RS
 .PP
 The variables are mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict with\fR;
@@ -59,3 +59,7 @@ while {1} {
 file(n), open(n), close(n), fblocked(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 channel, end of file
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -338,7 +338,6 @@ if {[catch {\fBexec\fR grep foo bar.txt} results options]} {
    }
 }
 .CE
-.VS 8.6
 .PP
 This is more easily written using the \fBtry\fR command, as that makes
 it simpler to trap specific types of errors. This is
@@ -352,7 +351,6 @@ try {
    set status [lindex [dict get $options -errorcode] 2]
 }
 .CE
-.VE 8.6
 .SS "WORKING WITH QUOTED ARGUMENTS"
 .PP
 When translating a command from a Unix shell invocation, care should
@@ -49,3 +49,7 @@ if {[catch {main} msg options]} {
 exec(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 abort, exit, process
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -17,14 +17,14 @@ expr \- Evaluate an expression
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-Concatenates \fIarg\fRs (adding separator spaces between them),
-evaluates the result as a Tcl expression, and returns the value.
-The operators permitted in Tcl expressions include a subset of
+The \fIexpr\fR command concatenates \fIarg\fRs, separated by a space, into an expression, and evaluates
+that expression, returning its value.
+The operators permitted in an expression include a subset of
 the operators permitted in C expressions.  For those operators
 common to both Tcl and C, Tcl applies the same meaning and precedence
 as the corresponding C operators.
-Expressions almost always yield numeric results
-(integer or floating-point values).
+The value of an expression is often a numeric result, either an integer or a
+floating-point value, but may also be a non-numeric value.
 For example, the expression
 .PP
 .CS
@@ -32,117 +32,148 @@ For example, the expression
 .CE
 .PP
 evaluates to 14.2.
-Tcl expressions differ from C expressions in the way that
-operands are specified.  Also, Tcl expressions support
-non-numeric operands and string comparisons, as well as some
+Expressions differ from C expressions in the way that
+operands are specified.  Expressions also support
+non-numeric operands, string comparisons, and some
 additional operators not found in C.
+.PP
+When an expression evaluates to an integer, the value is the decimal form of
+the integer, and when an expression evaluates to a floating-point number, the
+value is the form produced by the \fB%g\fR format specifier of Tcl's
+\fBformat\fR command.
+.PP
+.VS "TIP 582"
+You can use \fB#\fR at any point in the expression (except inside double
+quotes or braces) to start a comment. Comments last to the end of the line or
+the end of the expression, whichever comes first.
+.VE "TIP 582"
 .SS OPERANDS
 .PP
-A Tcl expression consists of a combination of operands, operators,
-parentheses and commas.
-White space may be used between the operands and operators and
-parentheses (or commas); it is ignored by the expression's instructions.
-Where possible, operands are interpreted as integer values.
-Integer values may be specified in decimal (the normal case), in binary
-(if the first two characters of the operand are \fB0b\fR), in octal
-(if the first two characters of the operand are \fB0o\fR), or in hexadecimal
-(if the first two characters of the operand are \fB0x\fR).  For
-compatibility with older Tcl releases, an octal integer value is also
-indicated simply when the first character of the operand is \fB0\fR,
-whether or not the second character is also \fBo\fR.
-If an operand does not have one of the integer formats given
-above, then it is treated as a floating-point number if that is
-possible.  Floating-point numbers may be specified in any of several
-common formats making use of the decimal digits, the decimal point \fB.\fR,
-the characters \fBe\fR or \fBE\fR indicating scientific notation, and
-the sign characters \fB+\fR or \fB\-\fR.  For example, all of the
-following are valid floating-point numbers:  2.1, 3., 6e4, 7.91e+16.
-Also recognized as floating point values are the strings \fBInf\fR
-and \fBNaN\fR making use of any case for each character.
-If no numeric interpretation is possible (note that all literal
-operands that are not numeric or boolean must be quoted with either
-braces or with double quotes), then an operand is left as a string
-(and only a limited set of operators may be applied to it).
+An expression consists of a combination of operands, operators, parentheses and
+commas, possibly with whitespace between any of these elements, which is
+ignored.
 .PP
-Operands may be specified in any of the following ways:
+An operand may be specified in any of the following ways:
 .IP [1]
 As a numeric value, either integer or floating-point.
 .IP [2]
 As a boolean value, using any form understood by \fBstring is\fR
 \fBboolean\fR.
 .IP [3]
-As a Tcl variable, using standard \fB$\fR notation.
-The variable's value will be used as the operand.
+As a variable, using standard \fB$\fR notation.
+The value of the variable is then the value of the operand.
 .IP [4]
 As a string enclosed in double-quotes.
-The expression parser will perform backslash, variable, and
-command substitutions on the information between the quotes,
-and use the resulting value as the operand
+Backslash, variable, and command substitution are performed as described in
+\fBTcl\fR.
 .IP [5]
 As a string enclosed in braces.
-The characters between the open brace and matching close brace
-will be used as the operand without any substitutions.
+The operand is treated as a braced value as described in \fBTcl\fR.
 .IP [6]
 As a Tcl command enclosed in brackets.
-The command will be executed and its result will be used as
-the operand.
+Command substitution is performed as described in \fBTcl\fR.
 .IP [7]
-As a mathematical function whose arguments have any of the above
-forms for operands, such as \fBsin($x)\fR.  See \fBMATH FUNCTIONS\fR below for
+As a mathematical function such as \fBsin($x)\fR, whose arguments have any of the above
+forms for operands.  See \fBMATH FUNCTIONS\fR below for
 a discussion of how mathematical functions are handled.
 .PP
-Where the above substitutions occur (e.g. inside quoted strings), they
-are performed by the expression's instructions.
-However, the command parser may already have performed one round of
-substitution before the expression processor was called.
-As discussed below, it is usually best to enclose expressions
-in braces to prevent the command parser from performing substitutions
-on the contents.
+Because \fBexpr\fR parses and performs substitutions on values that have
+already been parsed and substituted by \fBTcl\fR, it is usually best to enclose
+expressions in braces to avoid the first round of substitutions by
+\fBTcl\fR.
 .PP
-For some examples of simple expressions, suppose the variable
-\fBa\fR has the value 3 and
-the variable \fBb\fR has the value 6.
-Then the command on the left side of each of the lines below
-will produce the value on the right side of the line:
+Below are some examples of simple expressions where the value of \fBa\fR is 3
+and the value of \fBb\fR is 6.  The command on the left side of each line
+produces the value on the right side.
 .PP
 .CS
 .ta 9c
-\fBexpr\fR 3.1 + $a	\fI6.1\fR
-\fBexpr\fR 2 + "$a.$b"	\fI5.6\fR
-\fBexpr\fR 4*[llength "6 2"]	\fI8\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {3.1 + $a}	\fI6.1\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {2 + "$a.$b"}	\fI5.6\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {4*[llength "6 2"]}	\fI8\fR
 \fBexpr\fR {{word one} < "word $a"}	\fI0\fR
 .CE
+.PP
+\fBInteger value\fR
+.PP
+An integer operand may be specified in decimal (the normal case, the optional
+first two characters are \fB0d\fR), binary
+(the first two characters are \fB0b\fR), octal
+(the first two characters are \fB0o\fR), or hexadecimal
+(the first two characters are \fB0x\fR) form.  For
+compatibility with older Tcl releases, an operand that begins with \fB0\fR is
+interpreted as an octal integer even if the second character is not \fBo\fR.
+.PP
+\fBFloating-point value\fR
+.PP
+A floating-point number may be specified in any of several
+common decimal formats, and may use the decimal point \fB.\fR,
+\fBe\fR or \fBE\fR for scientific notation, and
+the sign characters \fB+\fR and \fB\-\fR.  The
+following are all valid floating-point numbers:  2.1, 3., 6e4, 7.91e+16.
+The strings \fBInf\fR
+and \fBNaN\fR, in any combination of case, are also recognized as floating point
+values.  An operand that doesn't have a numeric interpretation must be quoted
+with either braces or with double quotes.
+.PP
+\fBBoolean value\fR
+.PP
+A boolean value may be represented by any of the values \fB0\fR, \fBfalse\fR, \fBno\fR,
+or \fBoff\fR and any of the values \fB1\fR, \fBtrue\fR, \fByes\fR, or \fBon\fR.
+.PP
+\fBDigit Separator\fR
+.PP
+Digits in any numeric value may be separated with one or more underscore
+characters, "\fB_\fR", to improve readability.  These separators may only
+appear between digits.  The separator may not appear at the start of a
+numeric value, between the leading 0 and radix specifier, or at the
+end of a numeric value.  Here are some examples:
+.PP
+.CS
+.ta 9c
+\fBexpr\fR 100_000_000		\fI100000000\fR
+\fBexpr\fR 0xffff_ffff		\fI4294967295\fR
+\fBformat\fR 0x%x 0b1111_1110_1101_1011		\fI0xfedb\fR
+.CE
+.PP
 .SS OPERATORS
 .PP
-The valid operators (most of which are also available as commands in
-the \fBtcl::mathop\fR namespace; see the \fBmathop\fR(n) manual page
-for details) are listed below, grouped in decreasing order of precedence:
+For operators having both a numeric mode and a string mode, the numeric mode is
+chosen when all operands have a numeric interpretation.  The integer
+interpretation of an operand is preferred over the floating-point
+interpretation.  To ensure string operations on arbitrary values it is generally a
+good idea to use \fBeq\fR, \fBne\fR, or the \fBstring\fR command instead of
+more versatile operators such as \fB==\fR.
+.PP
+Unless otherwise specified, operators accept non-numeric operands.  The value
+of a boolean operation is 1 if true, 0 otherwise.  See also \fBstring is\fR
+\fBboolean\fR.  The valid operators, most of which are also available as
+commands in the \fBtcl::mathop\fR namespace (see \fBmathop\fR(n)), are listed
+below, grouped in decreasing order of precedence:
 .TP 20
 \fB\-\0\0+\0\0~\0\0!\fR
 .
-Unary minus, unary plus, bit-wise NOT, logical NOT.  None of these operators
-may be applied to string operands, and bit-wise NOT may be
-applied only to integers.
+Unary minus, unary plus, bit-wise NOT, logical NOT.  These operators
+may only be applied to numeric operands, and bit-wise NOT may only be
+applied to integers.
 .TP 20
 \fB**\fR
 .
-Exponentiation.  Valid for any numeric operands.  The maximum exponent value
+Exponentiation.  Valid for numeric operands.  The maximum exponent value
 that Tcl can handle if the first number is an integer > 1 is 268435455.
 .TP 20
 \fB*\0\0/\0\0%\fR
 .
-Multiply, divide, remainder.  None of these operators may be
-applied to string operands, and remainder may be applied only
-to integers.
-The remainder will always have the same sign as the divisor and
-an absolute value smaller than the absolute value of the divisor.
+Multiply and divide, which are valid for numeric operands, and remainder, which
+is valid for integers.  The remainder, an absolute value smaller than the
+absolute value of the divisor, has the same sign as the divisor.
 .RS
 .PP
-When applied to integers, the division and remainder operators can be
-considered to partition the number line into a sequence of equal-sized
-adjacent non-overlapping pieces where each piece is the size of the divisor;
-the division result identifies which piece the divisor lay within, and the
-remainder result identifies where within that piece the divisor lay. A
+When applied to integers, division and remainder can be
+considered to partition the number line into a sequence of
+adjacent non-overlapping pieces, where each piece is the size of the divisor;
+the quotient identifies which piece the dividend lies within, and the
+remainder identifies where within that piece the dividend lies. A
 consequence of this is that the result of
 .QW "-57 \fB/\fR 10"
 is always -6, and the result of
@@ -152,183 +183,175 @@ is always 3.
 .TP 20
 \fB+\0\0\-\fR
 .
-Add and subtract.  Valid for any numeric operands.
+Add and subtract.  Valid for numeric operands.
 .TP 20
 \fB<<\0\0>>\fR
 .
-Left and right shift.  Valid for integer operands only.
+Left and right shift.  Valid for integers.
 A right shift always propagates the sign bit.
 .TP 20
 \fB<\0\0>\0\0<=\0\0>=\fR
 .
-Boolean less, greater, less than or equal, and greater than or equal.
-Each operator produces 1 if the condition is true, 0 otherwise.
-These operators may be applied to strings as well as numeric operands,
-in which case string comparison is used.
+Boolean numeric-preferring comparisons: less than, greater than, less than or
+equal, and greater than or equal. If either argument is not numeric, the
+comparison is done using UNICODE string comparison, as with the string
+comparison operators below, which have the same precedence.
+.TP 20
+\fBlt\0\0gt\0\0le\0\0ge\fR
+.VS "8.7, TIP461"
+Boolean string comparisons: less than, greater than, less than or equal, and
+greater than or equal. These always compare values using their UNICODE strings
+(also see \fBstring compare\fR), unlike with the numeric-preferring
+comparisons abov, which have the same precedence.
+.VE "8.7, TIP461"
 .TP 20
 \fB==\0\0!=\fR
 .
-Boolean equal and not equal.  Each operator produces a zero/one result.
-Valid for all operand types.
+Boolean equal and not equal.
 .TP 20
 \fBeq\0\0ne\fR
 .
-Boolean string equal and string not equal.  Each operator produces a
-zero/one result.  The operand types are interpreted only as strings.
+Boolean string equal and string not equal.
 .TP 20
 \fBin\0\0ni\fR
 .
-List containment and negated list containment.  Each operator produces
-a zero/one result and treats its first argument as a string and its
-second argument as a Tcl list.  The \fBin\fR operator indicates
-whether the first argument is a member of the second argument list;
-the \fBni\fR operator inverts the sense of the result.
+List containment and negated list containment.  The first argument is
+interpreted as a string, the second as a list.  \fBin\fR tests for membership
+in the list, and \fBni\fR is the inverse.
 .TP 20
 \fB&\fR
 .
-Bit-wise AND.  Valid for integer operands only.
+Bit-wise AND.  Valid for integer operands.
 .TP 20
 \fB^\fR
 .
-Bit-wise exclusive OR.  Valid for integer operands only.
+Bit-wise exclusive OR.  Valid for integer operands.
 .TP 20
 \fB|\fR
 .
-Bit-wise OR.  Valid for integer operands only.
+Bit-wise OR.  Valid for integer operands.
 .TP 20
 \fB&&\fR
 .
-Logical AND.  Produces a 1 result if both operands are non-zero,
-0 otherwise.
-Valid for boolean and numeric (integers or floating-point) operands only.
+Logical AND.  If both operands are true, the result is 1, or 0 otherwise.
+This operator evaluates lazily; it only evaluates its second operand if it
+must in order to determine its result.
 This operator evaluates lazily; it only evaluates its second operand if it
 must in order to determine its result.
 .TP 20
 \fB||\fR
 .
-Logical OR.  Produces a 0 result if both operands are zero, 1 otherwise.
-Valid for boolean and numeric (integers or floating-point) operands only.
+Logical OR.  If both operands are false, the result is 0, or 1 otherwise.
 This operator evaluates lazily; it only evaluates its second operand if it
 must in order to determine its result.
 .TP 20
 \fIx \fB?\fI y \fB:\fI z\fR
 .
-If-then-else, as in C.  If \fIx\fR
-evaluates to non-zero, then the result is the value of \fIy\fR.
-Otherwise the result is the value of \fIz\fR.
-The \fIx\fR operand must have a boolean or numeric value.
+If-then-else, as in C.  If \fIx\fR is false , the result is the value of
+\fIy\fR.  Otherwise the result is the value of \fIz\fR.
 This operator evaluates lazily; it evaluates only one of \fIy\fR or \fIz\fR.
 .PP
-See the C manual for more details on the results
-produced by each operator.
-The exponentiation operator promotes types like the multiply and
-divide operators, and produces a result that is the same as the output
-of the \fBpow\fR function (after any type conversions.)
-All of the binary operators but exponentiation group left-to-right
-within the same precedence level; exponentiation groups right-to-left.  For example, the command
+The exponentiation operator promotes types in the same way that the multiply
+and divide operators do, and the result is is the same as the result of
+\fBpow\fR.
+Exponentiation groups right-to-left within a precedence level. Other binary
+operators group left-to-right.  For example, the value of
 .PP
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {4*2 < 7}
 .CE
 .PP
-returns 0, while
+is 0, while the value of
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {2**3**2}
 .CE
 .PP
-returns 512.
+is 512.
 .PP
-The \fB&&\fR, \fB||\fR, and \fB?:\fR operators have
+As in C, \fB&&\fR, \fB||\fR, and \fB?:\fR feature
 .QW "lazy evaluation" ,
-just as in C, which means that operands are not evaluated if they are
-not needed to determine the outcome.  For example, in the command
+which means that operands are not evaluated if they are
+not needed to determine the outcome.  For example, in
 .PP
 .CS
-\fBexpr\fR {$v ? [a] : [b]}
+\fBexpr\fR {$v?[a]:[b]}
 .CE
 .PP
-only one of
-.QW \fB[a]\fR
-or
-.QW \fB[b]\fR
-will actually be evaluated,
-depending on the value of \fB$v\fR.  Note, however, that this is
-only true if the entire expression is enclosed in braces;  otherwise
-the Tcl parser will evaluate both
-.QW \fB[a]\fR
-and
-.QW \fB[b]\fR
-before invoking the \fBexpr\fR command.
+only one of \fB[a]\fR or \fB[b]\fR is evaluated,
+depending on the value of \fB$v\fR.  This is not true of the normal Tcl parser,
+so it is normally recommended to enclose the arguments to \fBexpr\fR in braces.
+Without braces, as in
+\fBexpr\fR $v ? [a] : [b]
+both \fB[a]\fR and \fB[b]\fR are evaluated before \fBexpr\fR is even called.
+.PP
+For more details on the results
+produced by each operator, see the documentation for C.
 .SS "MATH FUNCTIONS"
 .PP
-When the expression parser encounters a mathematical function
-such as \fBsin($x)\fR, it replaces it with a call to an ordinary
-Tcl command in the \fBtcl::mathfunc\fR namespace.  The processing
-of an expression such as:
+A mathematical function such as \fBsin($x)\fR is replaced with a call to an ordinary
+Tcl command in the \fBtcl::mathfunc\fR namespace.  The evaluation
+of an expression such as
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {sin($x+$y)}
 .CE
 .PP
-is the same in every way as the processing of:
+is the same in every way as the evaluation of
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {[tcl::mathfunc::sin [\fBexpr\fR {$x+$y}]]}
 .CE
 .PP
-which in turn is the same as the processing of:
+which in turn is the same as the evaluation of
 .PP
 .CS
 tcl::mathfunc::sin [\fBexpr\fR {$x+$y}]
 .CE
 .PP
-The executor will search for \fBtcl::mathfunc::sin\fR using the usual
-rules for resolving functions in namespaces. Either
-\fB::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR or \fB[namespace
-current]::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR will satisfy the request, and others
-may as well (depending on the current \fBnamespace path\fR setting).
+\fBtcl::mathfunc::sin\fR is resolved as described in
+\fBNAMESPACE RESOLUTION\fR in the \fBnamespace\fR(n) documentation.   Given the
+default value of \fBnamespace path\fR, \fB[namespace
+current]::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR or \fB::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR are the typical
+resolutions.
 .PP
-Some mathematical functions have several arguments, separated by commas like in C. Thus:
+As in C, a mathematical function may accept multiple arguments separated by commas. Thus,
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {hypot($x,$y)}
 .CE
 .PP
-ends up as
+becomes
 .PP
 .CS
 tcl::mathfunc::hypot $x $y
 .CE
 .PP
-See the \fBmathfunc\fR(n) manual page for the math functions that are
+See the \fBmathfunc\fR(n) documentation for the math functions that are
 available by default.
 .SS "TYPES, OVERFLOW, AND PRECISION"
 .PP
-All internal computations involving integers are done calling on the
-LibTomMath multiple precision integer library as required so that all
-integer calculations are performed exactly.  Note that in Tcl releases
-prior to 8.5, integer calculations were performed with one of the C types
+When needed to guarantee exact performance, internal computations involving
+integers use the LibTomMath multiple precision integer library.  In Tcl releases
+prior to 8.5, integer calculations were performed using one of the C types
 \fIlong int\fR or \fITcl_WideInt\fR, causing implicit range truncation
 in those calculations where values overflowed the range of those types.
-Any code that relied on these implicit truncations will need to explicitly
-add \fBint()\fR or \fBwide()\fR function calls to expressions at the points
-where such truncation is required to take place.
+Any code that relied on these implicit truncations should instead call
+\fBint()\fR or \fBwide()\fR, which do truncate.
 .PP
-All internal computations involving floating-point are
-done with the C type \fIdouble\fR.
-When converting a string to floating-point, exponent overflow is
+Internal floating-point computations are
+performed using the \fIdouble\fR C type.
+When converting a string to floating-point value, exponent overflow is
 detected and results in the \fIdouble\fR value of \fBInf\fR or
 \fB\-Inf\fR as appropriate.  Floating-point overflow and underflow
 are detected to the degree supported by the hardware, which is generally
-pretty reliable.
+fairly reliable.
 .PP
-Conversion among internal representations for integer, floating-point,
-and string operands is done automatically as needed.
-For arithmetic computations, integers are used until some
-floating-point number is introduced, after which floating-point is used.
-For example,
+Conversion among internal representations for integer, floating-point, and
+string operands is done automatically as needed.  For arithmetic computations,
+integers are used until some floating-point number is introduced, after which
+floating-point values are used.  For example,
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {5 / 4}
@@ -342,53 +365,35 @@ returns 1, while
 .CE
 .PP
 both return 1.25.
-Floating-point values are always returned with a
+A floating-point result can be distinguished from an integer result by the
+presence of either
 .QW \fB.\fR
-or an
+or
 .QW \fBe\fR
-so that they will not look like integer values.  For example,
+.PP
+. For example,
 .PP
 .CS
 \fBexpr\fR {20.0/5.0}
 .CE
 .PP
 returns \fB4.0\fR, not \fB4\fR.
-.SS "STRING OPERATIONS"
-.PP
-String values may be used as operands of the comparison operators,
-although the expression evaluator tries to do comparisons as integer
-or floating-point when it can,
-i.e., when all arguments to the operator allow numeric interpretations,
-except in the case of the \fBeq\fR and \fBne\fR operators.
-If one of the operands of a comparison is a string and the other
-has a numeric value, a canonical string representation of the numeric
-operand value is generated to compare with the string operand.
-Canonical string representation for integer values is a decimal string
-format.  Canonical string representation for floating-point values
-is that produced by the \fB%g\fR format specifier of Tcl's
-\fBformat\fR command.  For example, the commands
-.PP
-.CS
-\fBexpr\fR {"0x03" > "2"}
-\fBexpr\fR {"0y" > "0x12"}
-.CE
-.PP
-both return 1.  The first comparison is done using integer
-comparison, and the second is done using string comparison.
-Because of Tcl's tendency to treat values as numbers whenever
-possible, it is not generally a good idea to use operators like \fB==\fR
-when you really want string comparison and the values of the
-operands could be arbitrary;  it is better in these cases to use
-the \fBeq\fR or \fBne\fR operators, or the \fBstring\fR command instead.
 .SH "PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS"
 .PP
-Enclose expressions in braces for the best speed and the smallest
-storage requirements.
-This allows the Tcl bytecode compiler to generate the best code.
+Where an expression contains syntax that Tcl would otherwise perform
+substitutions on, enclosing an expression in braces or otherwise quoting it
+so that it's a static value allows the Tcl compiler to generate bytecode for
+the expression, resulting in better speed and smaller storage requirements.
+This also avoids issues that can arise if Tcl is allowed to perform
+substitution on the value before \fBexpr\fR is called.
 .PP
-As mentioned above, expressions are substituted twice:
-once by the Tcl parser and once by the \fBexpr\fR command.
-For example, the commands
+In the following example, the value of the expression is 11 because the Tcl parser first
+substitutes \fB$b\fR and \fBexpr\fR then substitutes \fB$a\fR as part
+of evaluating the expression
+.QW "$a + 2*4" .
+Enclosing the
+expression in braces would result in a syntax error as \fB$b\fR does
+not evaluate to a numeric value.
 .PP
 .CS
 set a 3
@@ -396,25 +401,18 @@ set b {$a + 2}
 \fBexpr\fR $b*4
 .CE
 .PP
-return 11, not a multiple of 4.
-This is because the Tcl parser will first substitute
-.QW "\fB$a + 2\fR"
-for the variable \fBb\fR,
-then the \fBexpr\fR command will evaluate the expression
-.QW "\fB$a + 2*4\fR" .
+When an expression is generated at runtime, like the one above is, the bytecode
+compiler must ensure that new code is generated each time the expression
+is evaluated.  This is the most costly kind of expression from a performance
+perspective.  In such cases, consider directly using the commands described in
+the \fBmathfunc\fR(n) or \fBmathop\fR(n) documentation instead of \fBexpr\fR.
 .PP
-Most expressions do not require a second round of substitutions.
-Either they are enclosed in braces or, if not,
-their variable and command substitutions yield numbers or strings
-that do not themselves require substitutions.
-However, because a few unbraced expressions
-need two rounds of substitutions,
-the bytecode compiler must emit
-additional instructions to handle this situation.
-The most expensive code is required for
-unbraced expressions that contain command substitutions.
-These expressions must be implemented by generating new code
-each time the expression is executed.
+Most expressions are not formed at runtime, but are literal strings or contain
+substitutions that don't introduce other substitutions.  To allow the bytecode
+compiler to work with an expression as a string literal at compilation time,
+ensure that it contains no substitutions or that it is enclosed in braces or
+otherwise quoted to prevent Tcl from performing substitutions, allowing
+\fBexpr\fR to perform them instead.
 .PP
 If it is necessary to include a non-constant expression string within the
 wider context of an otherwise-constant expression, the most efficient
@@ -430,11 +428,33 @@ set b {$a + 2}
 \fBexpr\fR {[\fBexpr\fR $b] * 4}
 .CE
 .PP
-When the expression is unbraced to allow the substitution of a function or
-operator, consider using the commands documented in the \fBmathfunc\fR(n) or
-\fBmathop\fR(n) manual pages directly instead.
+In general, you should enclose your expression in braces wherever possible,
+and where not possible, the argument to \fBexpr\fR should be an expression
+defined elsewhere as simply as possible. It is usually more efficient and
+safer to use other techniques (e.g., the commands in the \fBtcl::mathop\fR
+namespace) than it is to do complex expression generation.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
+A numeric comparison whose result is 1:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBexpr\fR {"0x03" > "2"}
+.CE
+.PP
+A string comparison whose result is 1:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBexpr\fR {"0y" > "0x12"}
+.CE
+.PP
+.VS "8.7, TIP461"
+A forced string comparison whose result is 0:
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBexpr\fR {"0x03" gt "2"}
+.CE
+.VE "8.7, TIP461"
+.PP
 Define a procedure that computes an
 .QW interesting
 mathematical function:
@@ -468,12 +488,14 @@ each other:
 puts "a and b are [\fBexpr\fR {$a eq $b ? {equal} : {different}}]"
 .CE
 .PP
-Set a variable to whether an environment variable is both defined at
-all and also set to a true boolean value:
+Set a variable indicating whether an environment variable is defined and has
+value of true:
 .PP
 .CS
 set isTrue [\fBexpr\fR {
+    # Does the environment variable exist, and...
    [info exists ::env(SOME_ENV_VAR)] &&
+    # ...does it contain a proper true value?
    [string is true -strict $::env(SOME_ENV_VAR)]
 }]
 .CE
@@ -487,13 +509,14 @@ set randNum [\fBexpr\fR { int(100 * rand()) }]
 array(n), for(n), if(n), mathfunc(n), mathop(n), namespace(n), proc(n),
 string(n), Tcl(n), while(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
-arithmetic, boolean, compare, expression, fuzzy comparison
+arithmetic, boolean, compare, expression, fuzzy comparison, integer value
 .SH COPYRIGHT
 .nf
-Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-Copyright (c) 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems Incorporated.
-Copyright (c) 2005 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved.
+Copyright \(co 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+Copyright \(co 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems Incorporated.
+Copyright \(co 2005 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved.
 .fi
 '\" Local Variables:
 '\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
 '\" End:
@@ -65,3 +65,7 @@ vwait forever
 gets(n), open(n), read(n), socket(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 blocking, nonblocking
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -390,7 +390,7 @@ that use the third component do not attempt to perform tilde
 substitution.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBfile stat  \fIname varName\fR
+\fBfile stat \fIname varName\fR
 .
 Invokes the \fBstat\fR kernel call on \fIname\fR, and uses the variable
 given by \fIvarName\fR to hold information returned from the kernel call.
@@ -433,9 +433,38 @@ If \fIname\fR contains no separators then returns \fIname\fR.  So,
 \fBfile tail a/b\fR, \fBfile tail a/b/\fR and \fBfile tail b\fR all
 return \fBb\fR.
 .TP
+\fBfile tempdir\fR ?\fItemplate\fR?
+.VS "8.7, TIP 431"
+Creates a temporary directory (guaranteed to be newly created and writable by
+the current script) and returns its name. If \fItemplate\fR is given, it
+specifies one of or both of the existing directory (on a filesystem controlled
+by the operating system) to contain the temporary directory, and the base part
+of the directory name; it is considered to have the location of the directory
+if there is a directory separator in the name, and the base part is everything
+after the last directory separator (if non-empty).  The default containing
+directory is determined by system-specific operations, and the default base
+name prefix is
+.QW \fBtcl\fR .
+.RS
+.PP
+The following output is typical and illustrative; the actual output will vary
+between platforms:
+.PP
+.CS
+% \fBfile tempdir\fR
+/var/tmp/tcl_u0kuy5
+ % \fBfile tempdir\fR /tmp/myapp
+/tmp/myapp_8o7r9L
+% \fBfile tempdir\fR /tmp/
+/tmp/tcl_1mOJHD
+% \fBfile tempdir\fR myapp
+/var/tmp/myapp_0ihS0n
+.CE
+.RE
+.VE "8.7, TIP 431"
+.TP
 \fBfile tempfile\fR ?\fInameVar\fR? ?\fItemplate\fR?
 '\" TIP #210
-.VS 8.6
 Creates a temporary file and returns a read-write channel opened on that file.
 If the \fInameVar\fR is given, it specifies a variable that the name of the
 temporary file will be written into; if absent, Tcl will attempt to arrange
@@ -450,7 +479,6 @@ Note that temporary files are \fIonly\fR ever created on the native
 filesystem. As such, they can be relied upon to be used with operating-system
 native APIs and external programs that require a filename.
 .RE
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBfile type \fIname\fR
 .
@@ -154,3 +154,7 @@ fconfigure(n), gets(n), interp(n), puts(n), read(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 asynchronous I/O, blocking, channel, event handler, nonblocking, readable,
 script, writable.
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -176,3 +176,7 @@ file(n), glob(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 current directory, absolute file name, relative file name,
 volume-relative file name, portability
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -43,3 +43,7 @@ puts "Hello there, $name!"
 file(n), open(n), socket(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 blocking, buffer, channel, flush, nonblocking, output
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -102,3 +102,7 @@ for(n), while(n), break(n), continue(n)

 .SH KEYWORDS
 foreach, iteration, list, loop
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -83,12 +83,15 @@ Specifies that the number should be padded on the left with
 zeroes instead of spaces.
 .TP 10
 \fB#\fR
-Requests an alternate output form. For \fBo\fR
-conversions it guarantees that the first digit is always \fB0\fR.
-For \fBx\fR or \fBX\fR conversions, \fB0x\fR or \fB0X\fR (respectively)
+Requests an alternate output form. For \fBo\fR conversions,
+\fB0o\fR will be added to the beginning of the result unless
+it is zero. For \fBx\fR or \fBX\fR conversions, \fB0x\fR
 will be added to the beginning of the result unless it is zero.
 For \fBb\fR conversions, \fB0b\fR
 will be added to the beginning of the result unless it is zero.
+For \fBd\fR conversions, \fB0d\fR there is no effect unless
+the \fB0\fR specifier is used as well: In that case, \fB0d\fR
+will be added to the beginning.
 For all floating-point conversions (\fBe\fR, \fBE\fR, \fBf\fR,
 \fBg\fR, and \fBG\fR) it guarantees that the result always
 has a decimal point.
@@ -130,7 +133,7 @@ it must be a numeric string.
 .SS "OPTIONAL SIZE MODIFIER"
 .PP
 The fifth part of a conversion specifier is a size modifier,
-which must be \fBll\fR, \fBh\fR, or \fBl\fR.
+which must be \fBll\fR, \fBh\fR, \fBl\fR, or \fBL\fR.
 If it is \fBll\fR it specifies that an integer value is taken
 without truncation for conversion to a formatted substring.
 If it is \fBh\fR it specifies that an integer value is
@@ -138,7 +141,9 @@ truncated to a 16-bit range before converting.  This option is rarely useful.
 If it is \fBl\fR it specifies that the integer value is
 truncated to the same range as that produced by the \fBwide()\fR
 function of the \fBexpr\fR command (at least a 64-bit range).
-If neither \fBh\fR nor \fBl\fR are present, the integer value is
+If it is \fBL\fR it specifies that an integer or double value is taken
+without truncation for conversion to a formatted substring.
+If neither \fBh\fR nor \fBl\fR nor \fBL\fR are present, the integer value is
 truncated to the same range as that produced by the \fBint()\fR
 function of the \fBexpr\fR command (at least a 32-bit range, but
 determined by the value of the \fBwordSize\fR element of the
@@ -198,8 +203,19 @@ precision, then convert number as for \fB%e\fR or
 Otherwise convert as for \fB%f\fR.
 Trailing zeroes and a trailing decimal point are omitted.
 .TP 10
+\fBa\fR or \fBA\fR
+Convert double to hexadecimal notation in the form
+\fI0x1.yyy\fBp\(+-\fIzz\fR, where the number of \fIy\fR's is
+determined by the precision (default: 13).
+If the \fBA\fR form is used then the hex characters
+are printed in uppercase.
+.TP 10
 \fB%\fR
 No conversion: just insert \fB%\fR.
+.TP 10
+\fBp\fR
+Shorthand form for \fB0x%zx\fR, so it outputs the integer in
+hexadecimal form with \fB0x\fR prefix.
 .SH "DIFFERENCES FROM ANSI SPRINTF"
 .PP
 The behavior of the format command is the same as the
@@ -208,13 +224,12 @@ differences:
 .IP [1]
 Tcl guarantees that it will be working with UNICODE characters.
 .IP [2]
-\fB%p\fR and \fB%n\fR specifiers are not supported.
+\fB%n\fR specifier is not supported.
 .IP [3]
 For \fB%c\fR conversions the argument must be an integer value,
 which will then be converted to the corresponding character value.
 .IP [4]
 The size modifiers are ignored when formatting floating-point values.
-The \fBll\fR modifier has no \fBsprintf\fR counterpart.
 The \fBb\fR specifier has no \fBsprintf\fR counterpart.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
@@ -0,0 +1,83 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2018 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved
+'\" Copyright (c) 2019 by Donal Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.TH fpclassify n 8.7 Tcl "Tcl Float Classifier"
+.so man.macros
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+fpclassify \- Floating point number classification of Tcl values
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBTcl 8.7\fR
+.sp
+\fBfpclassify \fIvalue\fR
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+The \fBfpclassify\fR command takes a floating point number, \fIvalue\fR, and
+returns one of the following strings that describe it:
+.TP
+\fBzero\fR
+.
+\fIvalue\fR is a floating point zero.
+.TP
+\fBsubnormal\fR
+.
+\fIvalue\fR is the result of a gradual underflow.
+.TP
+\fBnormal\fR
+.
+\fIvalue\fR is an ordinary floating-point number (not zero, subnormal,
+infinite, nor NaN).
+.TP
+\fBinfinite\fR
+.
+\fIvalue\fR is a floating-point infinity.
+.TP
+\fBnan\fR
+.
+\fIvalue\fR is Not-a-Number.
+.PP
+The \fBfpclassify\fR command throws an error if value is not a floating-point
+value and cannot be converted to one.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+.PP
+This shows how to check whether the result of a computation is numerically
+safe or not. (Note however that it does not guard against numerical errors;
+just against representational problems.)
+.PP
+.CS
+set value [command-that-computes-a-value]
+switch [\fBfpclassify\fR $value] {
+    normal - zero {
+        puts "Result is $value"
+    }
+    infinite {
+        puts "Result is infinite"
+    }
+    subnormal {
+        puts "Result is $value - WARNING! precision lost"
+    }
+    nan {
+        puts "Computation completely failed"
+    }
+}
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+expr(n), mathfunc(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+floating point
+.SH STANDARDS
+This command depends on the \fBfpclassify\fR() C macro conforming to
+.QW "ISO C99"
+(i.e., to ISO/IEC 9899:1999).
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright \(co 2018 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved
+.fi
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" End:
@@ -56,3 +56,7 @@ proc accum {string} {
 namespace(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 global, namespace, procedure, variable
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -100,3 +100,7 @@ the \fBevent\fR operation to retrieve some event,
 and the \fBadd\fR operation to add it to history and execute it.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 event, history, record
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -13,10 +13,10 @@
 .SH NAME
 http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.1 protocol
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpackage require http ?2.9?\fR
+\fBpackage require http\fI ?\fB2.9\fR?
 .\" See Also -useragent option documentation in body!
 .sp
-\fB::http::config ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
+\fB::http::config\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
 .sp
 \fB::http::geturl \fIurl\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR ...?
 .sp
@@ -99,6 +99,15 @@ comma-separated list of mime type patterns that you are
 willing to receive.  For example,
 .QW "image/gif, image/jpeg, text/*" .
 .TP
+\fB\-cookiejar\fR \fIcommand\fR
+.VS TIP406
+The cookie store for the package to use to manage HTTP cookies.
+\fIcommand\fR is a command prefix list; if the empty list (the
+default value) is used, no cookies will be sent by requests or stored
+from responses. The command indicated by \fIcommand\fR, if supplied,
+must obey the \fBCOOKIE JAR PROTOCOL\fR described below.
+.VE TIP406
+.TP
 \fB\-pipeline\fR \fIboolean\fR
 .
 Specifies whether HTTP/1.1 transactions on a persistent socket will be
@@ -250,6 +259,10 @@ proc httpHandlerCallback {socket token} {
    return $nbytes
 }
 .CE
+.PP
+The \fBhttp::geturl\fR code for the \fB-handler\fR option is not compatible with either compression or chunked transfer-encoding.  If \fB-handler\fR is specified, then to work around these issues \fBhttp::geturl\fR will reduce the HTTP protocol to 1.0, and override the \fB-zip\fR option (i.e. it will not send the header "\fBAccept-Encoding: gzip,deflate,compress\fR").
+.PP
+If options \fB-handler\fR and \fB-channel\fR are used together, the handler is responsible for copying the data from the HTTP socket to the specified channel.  The name of the channel is available to the handler as element \fB-channel\fR of the token array.
 .RE
 .TP
 \fB\-headers\fR \fIkeyvaluelist\fR
@@ -770,6 +783,108 @@ Subsequent GET and HEAD requests in a failed pipeline will also be retried.
 that the retry is appropriate\fR - specifically, the application must know
 that if the failed POST successfully modified the state of the server, a repeat POST
 would have no adverse effect.
+.VS TIP406
+.SH "COOKIE JAR PROTOCOL"
+.PP
+Cookies are short key-value pairs used to implement sessions within the
+otherwise-stateless HTTP protocol. (See RFC 6265 for details; Tcl does not
+implement the Cookie2 protocol as that is rarely seen in the wild.)
+.PP
+Cookie storage managment commands \(em
+.QW "cookie jars"
+\(em must support these subcommands which form the HTTP cookie storage
+management protocol. Note that \fIcookieJar\fR below does not have to be a
+command name; it is properly a command prefix (a Tcl list of words that will
+be expanded in place) and admits many possible implementations.
+.PP
+Though not formally part of the protocol, it is expected that particular
+values of \fIcookieJar\fR will correspond to sessions; it is up to the caller
+of \fB::http::config\fR to decide what session applies and to manage the
+deletion of said sessions when they are no longer desired (which should be
+when they not configured as the current cookie jar).
+.TP
+\fIcookieJar \fBgetCookies \fIprotocol host requestPath\fR
+.
+This command asks the cookie jar what cookies should be supplied for a
+particular request. It should take the \fIprotocol\fR (typically \fBhttp\fR or
+\fBhttps\fR), \fIhost\fR name and \fIrequestPath\fR (parsed from the \fIurl\fR
+argument to \fB::http::geturl\fR) and return a list of cookie keys and values
+that describe the cookies to supply to the remote host. The list must have an
+even number of elements.
+.RS
+.PP
+There should only ever be at most one cookie with a particular key for any
+request (typically the one with the most specific \fIhost\fR/domain match and
+most specific \fIrequestPath\fR/path match), but there may be many cookies
+with different names in any request.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcookieJar \fBstoreCookie \fIcookieDictionary\fR
+.
+This command asks the cookie jar to store a particular cookie that was
+returned by a request; the result of this command is ignored. The cookie
+(which will have been parsed by the http package) is described by a
+dictionary, \fIcookieDictionary\fR, that may have the following keys:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fBdomain\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value describes the domain hostname \fIor
+prefix\fR that the cookie should be returned for.  The checking of the domain
+against the origin (below) should be careful since sites that issue cookies
+should only do so for domains related to themselves. Cookies that do not obey
+a relevant origin matching rule should be ignored.
+.TP
+\fBexpires\fR
+.
+This is optional. If present, the cookie is intended to be a persistent cookie
+and the value of the option is the Tcl timestamp (in seconds from the same
+base as \fBclock seconds\fR) of when the cookie expires (which may be in the
+past, which should result in the cookie being deleted immediately). If absent,
+the cookie is intended to be a session cookie that should be not persisted
+beyond the lifetime of the cookie jar.
+.TP
+\fBhostonly\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value is a boolean that describes whether the
+cookie is a single host cookie (true) or a domain-level cookie (false).
+.TP
+\fBhttponly\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value is a boolean that is true when the site
+wishes the cookie to only ever be used with HTTP (or HTTPS) traffic.
+.TP
+\fBkey\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value is the \fIkey\fR of the cookie, which is
+part of the information that must be return when sending this cookie back in a
+future request.
+.TP
+\fBorigin\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value describes where the http package believes it
+received the cookie from, which may be useful for checking whether the
+cookie's domain is valid.
+.TP
+\fBpath\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value describes the path prefix of requests to the
+cookie domain where the cookie should be returned.
+.TP
+\fBsecure\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value is a boolean that is true when the cookie
+should only used on requests sent over secure channels (typically HTTPS).
+.TP
+\fBvalue\fR
+.
+This is always present. Its value is the value of the cookie, which is part of
+the information that must be return when sending this cookie back in a future
+request.
+.PP
+Other keys may always be ignored; they have no meaning in this protocol.
+.RE
+.VE TIP406
 .SH EXAMPLE
 .PP
 This example creates a procedure to copy a URL to a file while printing a
@@ -0,0 +1,88 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2014-2018 Donal K. Fellows.
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.TH "idna" n 0.1 http "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.so man.macros
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+tcl::idna \- Support for normalization of Internationalized Domain Names
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+package require tcl::idna 1.0
+
+\fBtcl::idna decode\fR \fIhostname\fR
+\fBtcl::idna encode\fR \fIhostname\fR
+\fBtcl::idna puny decode\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIcase\fR?
+\fBtcl::idna puny encode\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIcase\fR?
+\fBtcl::idna version\fR
+.fi
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This package provides an implementation of the punycode scheme used in
+Internationalised Domain Names, and some access commands. (See RFC 3492 for a
+description of punycode.)
+.TP
+\fBtcl::idna decode\fR \fIhostname\fR
+.
+This command takes the name of a host that potentially contains
+punycode-encoded character sequences, \fIhostname\fR, and returns the hostname
+as might be displayed to the user. Note that there are often UNICODE
+characters that have extremely similar glyphs, so care should be taken with
+displaying hostnames to users.
+.TP
+\fBtcl::idna encode\fR \fIhostname\fR
+.
+This command takes the name of a host as might be displayed to the user,
+\fIhostname\fR, and returns the version of the hostname with characters not
+permitted in basic hostnames encoded with punycode.
+.TP
+\fBtcl::idna puny\fR \fIsubcommand ...\fR
+.
+This command provides direct access to the basic punycode encoder and
+decoder. It supports two \fIsubcommand\fRs:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fBtcl::idna puny decode\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIcase\fR?
+.
+This command decodes the punycode-encoded string, \fIstring\fR, and returns
+the result. If \fIcase\fR is provided, it is a boolean to make the case be
+folded to upper case (if \fIcase\fR is true) or lower case (if \fIcase\fR is
+false) during the decoding process; if omitted, no case transformation is
+applied.
+.TP
+\fBtcl::idna puny encode\fR \fIstring\fR ?\fIcase\fR?
+.
+This command encodes the string, \fIstring\fR, and returns the
+punycode-encoded version of the string. If \fIcase\fR is provided, it is a
+boolean to make the case be folded to upper case (if \fIcase\fR is true) or
+lower case (if \fIcase\fR is false) during the encoding process; if omitted,
+no case transformation is applied.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBtcl::idna version\fR
+.
+This returns the version of the \fBtcl::idna\fR package.
+.SH "EXAMPLE"
+.PP
+This is an example of how punycoding of a string works:
+.PP
+.CS
+package require tcl::idna
+
+puts [\fBtcl::idna puny encode\fR "abc\(->def"]
+#    prints: \fIabcdef-kn2c\fR
+puts [\fBtcl::idna puny decode\fR "abcdef-kn2c"]
+#    prints: \fIabc\(->def\fR
+.CE
+'\" TODO: show how it handles a real domain name
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+http(n), cookiejar(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+internet, www
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -27,6 +27,11 @@ and also returned as result.
 Starting with the Tcl 8.5 release, the variable \fIvarName\fR passed
 to \fBincr\fR may be unset, and in that case, it will be set to
 the value \fIincrement\fR or to the default increment value of \fB1\fR.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIvarName\fR indicate an element that does not exist of an array that has
+a default value set, the sum of the default value and the \fIincrement\fR (or
+1) will be stored in the array element.
+.VE TIP508
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
 Add one to the contents of the variable \fIx\fR:
@@ -59,3 +64,7 @@ an error if it is not):
 expr(n), set(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 add, increment, variable, value
+.\" Local variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -19,18 +19,18 @@ interp \- Create and manipulate Tcl interpreters
 .PP
 This command makes it possible to create one or more new Tcl
 interpreters that co-exist with the creating interpreter in the
-same application.  The creating interpreter is called the \fImaster\fR
-and the new interpreter is called a \fIslave\fR.
-A master can create any number of slaves, and each slave can
-itself create additional slaves for which it is master, resulting
+same application.  The creating interpreter is called the \fIparent\fR
+and the new interpreter is called a \fIchild\fR.
+A parent can create any number of children, and each child can
+itself create additional children for which it is parent, resulting
 in a hierarchy of interpreters.
 .PP
 Each interpreter is independent from the others: it has its own name
 space for commands, procedures, and global variables.
-A master interpreter may create connections between its slaves and
+A parent interpreter may create connections between its children and
 itself using a mechanism called an \fIalias\fR.  An \fIalias\fR is
-a command in a slave interpreter which, when invoked, causes a
-command to be invoked in its master interpreter or in another slave
+a command in a child interpreter which, when invoked, causes a
+command to be invoked in its parent interpreter or in another child
 interpreter.  The only other connections between interpreters are
 through environment variables (the \fBenv\fR variable), which are
 normally shared among all interpreters in the application,
@@ -41,7 +41,7 @@ share files and to transfer references to open files from one interpreter
 to another.
 .PP
 The \fBinterp\fR command also provides support for \fIsafe\fR
-interpreters.  A safe interpreter is a slave whose functions have
+interpreters.  A safe interpreter is a child whose functions have
 been greatly restricted, so that it is safe to execute untrusted
 scripts without fear of them damaging other interpreters or the
 application's environment. For example, all IO channel creation
@@ -54,18 +54,18 @@ instead, it is \fIhidden\fR, so that only trusted interpreters can obtain
 access to it. For a detailed explanation of hidden commands, see
 \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 The alias mechanism can be used for protected communication (analogous to a
-kernel call) between a slave interpreter and its master.
+kernel call) between a child interpreter and its parent.
 See \fBALIAS INVOCATION\fR, below, for more details
 on how the alias mechanism works.
 .PP
-A qualified interpreter name is a proper Tcl lists containing a subset of its
+A qualified interpreter name is a proper Tcl list containing a subset of its
 ancestors in the interpreter hierarchy, terminated by the string naming the
-interpreter in its immediate master. Interpreter names are relative to the
+interpreter in its immediate parent. Interpreter names are relative to the
 interpreter in which they are used. For example, if
 .QW \fBa\fR
-is a slave of the current interpreter and it has a slave
+is a child of the current interpreter and it has a child
 .QW \fBa1\fR ,
-which in turn has a slave
+which in turn has a child
 .QW \fBa11\fR ,
 the qualified name of
 .QW \fBa11\fR
@@ -77,14 +77,14 @@ is the list
 The \fBinterp\fR command, described below, accepts qualified interpreter
 names as arguments; the interpreter in which the command is being evaluated
 can always be referred to as \fB{}\fR (the empty list or string). Note that
-it is impossible to refer to a master (ancestor) interpreter by name in a
-slave interpreter except through aliases. Also, there is no global name by
+it is impossible to refer to a parent (ancestor) interpreter by name in a
+child interpreter except through aliases. Also, there is no global name by
 which one can refer to the first interpreter created in an application.
 Both restrictions are motivated by safety concerns.
 .SH "THE INTERP COMMAND"
 .PP
 The \fBinterp\fR command is used to create, delete, and manipulate
-slave interpreters, and to share or transfer
+child interpreters, and to share or transfer
 channels between interpreters.  It can have any of several forms, depending
 on the \fIsubcommand\fR argument:
 .TP
@@ -94,11 +94,11 @@ Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the \fItargetCmd\fR and
 \fIarg\fRs associated with the alias represented by \fIsrcToken\fR
 (this is the value returned when the alias was
 created; it is possible that the name of the source command in the
-slave is different from \fIsrcToken\fR).
+child is different from \fIsrcToken\fR).
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBalias\fR \fIsrcPath\fR \fIsrcToken\fR \fB{}\fR
 .
-Deletes the alias for \fIsrcToken\fR in the slave interpreter identified by
+Deletes the alias for \fIsrcToken\fR in the child interpreter identified by
 \fIsrcPath\fR.
 \fIsrcToken\fR refers to the value returned when the alias
 was created;  if the source command has been renamed, the renamed
@@ -106,9 +106,9 @@ command will be deleted.
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBalias\fR \fIsrcPath\fR \fIsrcCmd\fR \fItargetPath\fR \fItargetCmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .
-This command creates an alias between one slave and another (see the
-\fBalias\fR slave command below for creating aliases between a slave
-and its master).  In this command, either of the slave interpreters
+This command creates an alias between one child and another (see the
+\fBalias\fR child command below for creating aliases between a child
+and its parent).  In this command, either of the child interpreters
 may be anywhere in the hierarchy of interpreters under the interpreter
 invoking the command.
 \fISrcPath\fR and \fIsrcCmd\fR identify the source of the alias.
@@ -117,9 +117,9 @@ interpreter.  For example,
 .QW "\fBa b\fR"
 identifies an interpreter
 .QW \fBb\fR ,
-which is a slave of interpreter
+which is a child of interpreter
 .QW \fBa\fR ,
-which is a slave of the invoking interpreter.  An empty list specifies
+which is a child of the invoking interpreter.  An empty list specifies
 the interpreter invoking the command.  \fIsrcCmd\fR gives the name of
 a new command, which will be created in the source interpreter.
 \fITargetPath\fR and \fItargetCmd\fR specify a target interpreter
@@ -154,7 +154,6 @@ what to set the interpreter's background exception handler to. See the
 \fBBACKGROUND EXCEPTION HANDLING\fR section for more details.
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBcancel \fR?\fB\-unwind\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIpath\fR? ?\fIresult\fR?
-.VS 8.6
 Cancels the script being evaluated in the interpreter identified by
 \fIpath\fR. Without the \fB\-unwind\fR switch the evaluation stack for
 the interpreter is unwound until an enclosing catch command is found or
@@ -167,37 +166,36 @@ switches; it may be needed if \fIpath\fR is an unusual value such
 as \fB\-safe\fR. If \fIresult\fR is present, it will be used as the
 error message string; otherwise, a default error message string will be
 used.
-.VE 8.6
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBcreate \fR?\fB\-safe\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIpath\fR?
 .
-Creates a slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR and a new command,
-called a \fIslave command\fR. The name of the slave command is the last
-component of \fIpath\fR. The new slave interpreter and the slave command
+Creates a child interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR and a new command,
+called a \fIchild command\fR. The name of the child command is the last
+component of \fIpath\fR. The new child interpreter and the child command
 are created in the interpreter identified by the path obtained by removing
 the last component from \fIpath\fR. For example, if \fIpath\fR is \fBa b
-c\fR then a new slave interpreter and slave command named \fBc\fR are
+c\fR then a new child interpreter and child command named \fBc\fR are
 created in the interpreter identified by the path \fBa b\fR.
-The slave command may be used to manipulate the new interpreter as
+The child command may be used to manipulate the new interpreter as
 described below. If \fIpath\fR is omitted, Tcl creates a unique name of the
 form \fBinterp\fIx\fR, where \fIx\fR is an integer, and uses it for the
-interpreter and the slave command. If the \fB\-safe\fR switch is specified
-(or if the master interpreter is a safe interpreter), the new slave
+interpreter and the child command. If the \fB\-safe\fR switch is specified
+(or if the parent interpreter is a safe interpreter), the new child
 interpreter will be created as a safe interpreter with limited
-functionality; otherwise the slave will include the full set of Tcl
+functionality; otherwise the child will include the full set of Tcl
 built-in commands and variables. The \fB\-\|\-\fR switch can be used to
 mark the end of switches;  it may be needed if \fIpath\fR is an unusual
 value such as \fB\-safe\fR. The result of the command is the name of the
-new interpreter. The name of a slave interpreter must be unique among all
-the slaves for its master;  an error occurs if a slave interpreter by the
-given name already exists in this master.
-The initial recursion limit of the slave interpreter is set to the
+new interpreter. The name of a child interpreter must be unique among all
+the children for its parent;  an error occurs if a child interpreter by the
+given name already exists in this parent.
+The initial recursion limit of the child interpreter is set to the
 current recursion limit of its parent interpreter.
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBdebug \fIpath\fR ?\fB\-frame\fR ?\fIbool\fR??
 .
 Controls whether frame-level stack information is captured in the
-slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR.  If no arguments are
+child interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR.  If no arguments are
 given, option and current setting are returned.  If \fB\-frame\fR
 is given, the debug setting is set to the given boolean if provided
 and the current setting is returned.
@@ -236,11 +234,11 @@ attempts are silently ignored. This is needed to maintain the
 consistency of the underlying interpreter's state.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBdelete \fR?\fIpath ...?\fR
+\fBinterp\fR \fBdelete \fR?\fIpath ...\fR?
 .
 Deletes zero or more interpreters given by the optional \fIpath\fR
-arguments, and for each interpreter, it also deletes its slaves. The
-command also deletes the slave command for each interpreter deleted.
+arguments, and for each interpreter, it also deletes its children. The
+command also deletes the child command for each interpreter deleted.
 For each \fIpath\fR argument, if no interpreter by that name
 exists, the command raises an error.
 .TP
@@ -248,20 +246,20 @@ exists, the command raises an error.
 .
 This command concatenates all of the \fIarg\fR arguments in the same
 fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, then evaluates the resulting string as
-a Tcl script in the slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. The result
+a Tcl script in the child interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. The result
 of this evaluation (including all \fBreturn\fR options,
 such as \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR information, if an
 error occurs) is returned to the invoking interpreter.
 Note that the script will be executed in the current context stack frame of the
-\fIpath\fR interpreter; this is so that the implementations (in a master
-interpreter) of aliases in a slave interpreter can execute scripts in
-the slave that find out information about the slave's current state
+\fIpath\fR interpreter; this is so that the implementations (in a parent
+interpreter) of aliases in a child interpreter can execute scripts in
+the child that find out information about the child's current state
 and stack frame.
 .TP
 \fBinterp exists \fIpath\fR
 .
-Returns \fB1\fR if a slave interpreter by the specified \fIpath\fR
-exists in this master, \fB0\fR otherwise. If \fIpath\fR is omitted, the
+Returns \fB1\fR if a child interpreter by the specified \fIpath\fR
+exists in this parent, \fB0\fR otherwise. If \fIpath\fR is omitted, the
 invoking interpreter is used.
 .TP
 \fBinterp expose \fIpath\fR \fIhiddenName\fR ?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
@@ -287,7 +285,7 @@ Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can
 not contain namespace qualifiers, or an error is raised.
 Commands to be hidden by \fBinterp hide\fR are looked up in the global
 namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
-prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
+prevents children from fooling a parent interpreter into hiding the wrong
 command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
 Hidden commands are explained in more detail in \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 .TP
@@ -371,17 +369,15 @@ Both interpreters must close it to close the underlying IO channel; IO
 channels accessible in an interpreter are automatically closed when an
 interpreter is destroyed.
 .TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBslaves\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
+\fBinterp\fR \fBchildren\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
 .
-Returns a Tcl list of the names of all the slave interpreters associated
+Returns a Tcl list of the names of all the child interpreters associated
 with the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. If \fIpath\fR is omitted,
 the invoking interpreter is used.
 .TP
-.VS "TIP 581"
-\fBinterp\fR \fBchildren\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
+\fBinterp\fR \fBslaves\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
 .
-Synonym for . \fBinterp\fR \fBslaves\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
-.VE "TIP 581"
+Synonym for . \fBinterp\fR \fBchildren\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBtarget\fR \fIpath alias\fR
 .
@@ -399,48 +395,48 @@ The target command does not have to be defined at the time of this invocation.
 Causes the IO channel identified by \fIchannelId\fR to become available in
 the interpreter identified by \fIdestPath\fR and unavailable in the
 interpreter identified by \fIsrcPath\fR.
-.SH "SLAVE COMMAND"
+.SH "CHILD COMMAND"
 .PP
-For each slave interpreter created with the \fBinterp\fR command, a
-new Tcl command is created in the master interpreter with the same
+For each child interpreter created with the \fBinterp\fR command, a
+new Tcl command is created in the parent interpreter with the same
 name as the new interpreter. This command may be used to invoke
 various operations on the interpreter.  It has the following
 general form:
 .PP
 .CS
-\fIslave command \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
+\fIchild command \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .CE
 .PP
-\fISlave\fR is the name of the interpreter, and \fIcommand\fR
+\fIChild\fR is the name of the interpreter, and \fIcommand\fR
 and the \fIarg\fRs determine the exact behavior of the command.
 The valid forms of this command are:
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBaliases\fR
+\fIchild \fBaliases\fR
 .
 Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the tokens of all the
-aliases in \fIslave\fR.  The tokens correspond to the values returned when
+aliases in \fIchild\fR.  The tokens correspond to the values returned when
 the aliases were created (which may not be the same
 as the current names of the commands).
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcToken\fR
+\fIchild \fBalias \fIsrcToken\fR
 .
 Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the \fItargetCmd\fR and
 \fIarg\fRs associated with the alias represented by \fIsrcToken\fR
 (this is the value returned when the alias was
 created; it is possible that the actual source command in the
-slave is different from \fIsrcToken\fR).
+child is different from \fIsrcToken\fR).
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcToken \fB{}\fR
+\fIchild \fBalias \fIsrcToken \fB{}\fR
 .
-Deletes the alias for \fIsrcToken\fR in the slave interpreter.
+Deletes the alias for \fIsrcToken\fR in the child interpreter.
 \fIsrcToken\fR refers to the value returned when the alias
 was created;  if the source command has been renamed, the renamed
 command will be deleted.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcCmd targetCmd \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
+\fIchild \fBalias \fIsrcCmd targetCmd \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
 .
 Creates an alias such that whenever \fIsrcCmd\fR is invoked
-in \fIslave\fR, \fItargetCmd\fR is invoked in the master.
+in \fIchild\fR, \fItargetCmd\fR is invoked in the parent.
 The \fIarg\fR arguments will be passed to \fItargetCmd\fR as additional
 arguments, prepended before any arguments passed in the invocation of
 \fIsrcCmd\fR.
@@ -449,69 +445,69 @@ The command returns a token that uniquely identifies the command created
 \fIsrcCmd\fR, even if the command is renamed afterwards. The token may but
 does not have to be equal to \fIsrcCmd\fR.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBbgerror\fR ?\fIcmdPrefix\fR?
+\fIchild \fBbgerror\fR ?\fIcmdPrefix\fR?
 .
 This command either gets or sets the current background exception handler
-for the \fIslave\fR interpreter. If \fIcmdPrefix\fR is
+for the \fIchild\fR interpreter. If \fIcmdPrefix\fR is
 absent, the current background exception handler is returned, and if it is
 present, it is a list of words (of minimum length one) that describes
 what to set the interpreter's background exception handler to. See the
 \fBBACKGROUND EXCEPTION HANDLING\fR section for more details.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBeval \fIarg \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
+\fIchild \fBeval \fIarg \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
 .
 This command concatenates all of the \fIarg\fR arguments in
 the same fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, then evaluates
-the resulting string as a Tcl script in \fIslave\fR.
+the resulting string as a Tcl script in \fIchild\fR.
 The result of this evaluation (including all \fBreturn\fR options,
 such as \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR information, if an
 error occurs) is returned to the invoking interpreter.
 Note that the script will be executed in the current context stack frame
-of \fIslave\fR; this is so that the implementations (in a master
-interpreter) of aliases in a slave interpreter can execute scripts in
-the slave that find out information about the slave's current state
+of \fIchild\fR; this is so that the implementations (in a parent
+interpreter) of aliases in a child interpreter can execute scripts in
+the child that find out information about the child's current state
 and stack frame.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBexpose \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
+\fIchild \fBexpose \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
 .
 This command exposes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR, eventually bringing
 it back under a new \fIexposedCmdName\fR name (this name is currently
 accepted only if it is a valid global name space name without any ::),
-in \fIslave\fR.
+in \fIchild\fR.
 If an exposed command with the targeted name already exists, this command
 fails.
 For more details on hidden commands, see \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBhide \fIexposedCmdName\fR ?\fIhiddenCmdName\fR?
+\fIchild \fBhide \fIexposedCmdName\fR ?\fIhiddenCmdName\fR?
 .
 This command hides the exposed command \fIexposedCmdName\fR, renaming it to
 the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR, or keeping the same name if the
-argument is not given, in the \fIslave\fR interpreter.
+argument is not given, in the \fIchild\fR interpreter.
 If a hidden command with the targeted name already exists, this command
 fails.
 Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can
 not contain namespace qualifiers, or an error is raised.
 Commands to be hidden are looked up in the global
 namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
-prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
+prevents children from fooling a parent interpreter into hiding the wrong
 command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
 For more details on hidden commands, see \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBhidden\fR
+\fIchild \fBhidden\fR
 .
-Returns a list of the names of all hidden commands in \fIslave\fR.
+Returns a list of the names of all hidden commands in \fIchild\fR.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBinvokehidden\fR ?\fI\-option ...\fR? \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
+\fIchild \fBinvokehidden\fR ?\fI\-option ...\fR? \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
 .
 This command invokes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR with the
-supplied arguments, in \fIslave\fR. No substitutions or evaluations are
+supplied arguments, in \fIchild\fR. No substitutions or evaluations are
 applied to the arguments. Three \fI\-option\fRs are supported, all
 of which start with \fB\-\fR: \fB\-namespace\fR (which takes a single
 argument afterwards, \fInsName\fR), \fB\-global\fR, and \fB\-\|\-\fR.
 If the \fB\-namespace\fR flag is given, the hidden command is invoked in
-the specified namespace in the slave.
+the specified namespace in the child.
 If the \fB\-global\fR flag is given, the command is invoked at the global
-level in the slave; otherwise it is invoked at the current call frame and
+level in the child; otherwise it is invoked at the current call frame and
 can access local variables in that or outer call frames.
 The \fB\-\|\-\fR flag allows the \fIhiddenCmdName\fR argument to start with a
 .QW \-
@@ -519,37 +515,37 @@ character, and is otherwise unnecessary.
 If both the \fB\-namespace\fR and \fB\-global\fR flags are given, the
 \fB\-namespace\fR flag is ignored.
 Note that the hidden command will be executed (by default) in the
-current context stack frame of \fIslave\fR.
+current context stack frame of \fIchild\fR.
 For more details on hidden commands,
 see \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBissafe\fR
+\fIchild \fBissafe\fR
 .
-Returns  \fB1\fR if the slave interpreter is safe, \fB0\fR otherwise.
+Returns  \fB1\fR if the child interpreter is safe, \fB0\fR otherwise.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBlimit\fR \fIlimitType\fR ?\fI\-option\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR \fI...\fR?
+\fIchild \fBlimit\fR \fIlimitType\fR ?\fI\-option\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR \fI...\fR?
 .
 Sets up, manipulates and queries the configuration of the resource
-limit \fIlimitType\fR for the slave interpreter.  If no \fI\-option\fR
+limit \fIlimitType\fR for the child interpreter.  If no \fI\-option\fR
 is specified, return the current configuration of the limit.  If
 \fI\-option\fR is the sole argument, return the value of that option.
 Otherwise, a list of \fI\-option\fR/\fIvalue\fR argument pairs must
 supplied. See \fBRESOURCE LIMITS\fR below for a more detailed explanation of
 what limits and options are supported.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBmarktrusted\fR
+\fIchild \fBmarktrusted\fR
 .
-Marks the slave interpreter as trusted. Can only be invoked by a
+Marks the child interpreter as trusted. Can only be invoked by a
 trusted interpreter. This command does not expose any hidden
-commands in the slave interpreter. The command has no effect if the slave
+commands in the child interpreter. The command has no effect if the child
 is already trusted.
 .TP
-\fIslave\fR \fBrecursionlimit\fR ?\fInewlimit\fR?
+\fIchild\fR \fBrecursionlimit\fR ?\fInewlimit\fR?
 .
-Returns the maximum allowable nesting depth for the \fIslave\fR interpreter.
-If \fInewlimit\fR is specified, the recursion limit in \fIslave\fR will be
+Returns the maximum allowable nesting depth for the \fIchild\fR interpreter.
+If \fInewlimit\fR is specified, the recursion limit in \fIchild\fR will be
 set so that nesting of more than \fInewlimit\fR calls to \fBTcl_Eval()\fR
-and related procedures in \fIslave\fR will return an error.
+and related procedures in \fIchild\fR will return an error.
 The \fInewlimit\fR value is also returned.
 The \fInewlimit\fR value must be a positive integer between 1 and the
 maximum value of a non-long integer on the platform.
@@ -573,14 +569,14 @@ For example, commands to create files on disk are removed, and the
 \fBexec\fR command is removed, since it could be used to cause damage
 through subprocesses.
 Limited access to these facilities can be provided, by creating
-aliases to the master interpreter which check their arguments carefully
+aliases to the parent interpreter which check their arguments carefully
 and provide restricted access to a safe subset of facilities.
 For example, file creation might be allowed in a particular subdirectory
 and subprocess invocation might be allowed for a carefully selected and
 fixed set of programs.
 .PP
 A safe interpreter is created by specifying the \fB\-safe\fR switch
-to the \fBinterp create\fR command.  Furthermore, any slave created
+to the \fBinterp create\fR command.  Furthermore, any child created
 by a safe interpreter will also be safe.
 .PP
 A safe interpreter is created with exactly the following set of
@@ -667,15 +663,15 @@ including itself.
 .SH "ALIAS INVOCATION"
 .PP
 The alias mechanism has been carefully designed so that it can
-be used safely when an untrusted script is executing
-in a safe slave and the target of the alias is a trusted
-master.  The most important thing in guaranteeing safety is to
-ensure that information passed from the slave to the master is
-never evaluated or substituted in the master;  if this were to
-occur, it would enable an evil script in the slave to invoke
-arbitrary functions in the master, which would compromise security.
+be used safely in an untrusted script which is being executed in a
+safe interpreter even if the target of the alias is not a safe
+interpreter.  The most important thing in guaranteeing safety is to
+ensure that information passed from the child to the parent is
+never evaluated or substituted in the parent;  if this were to
+occur, it would enable an evil script in the child to invoke
+arbitrary functions in the parent, which would compromise security.
 .PP
-When the source for an alias is invoked in the slave interpreter, the
+When the source for an alias is invoked in the child interpreter, the
 usual Tcl substitutions are performed when parsing that command.
 These substitutions are carried out in the source interpreter just
 as they would be for any other command invoked in that interpreter.
@@ -702,8 +698,8 @@ the alias's source command is parsed in the source interpreter.
 When writing the \fItargetCmd\fRs for aliases in safe interpreters,
 it is very important that the arguments to that command never be
 evaluated or substituted, since this would provide an escape
-mechanism whereby the slave interpreter could execute arbitrary
-code in the master.  This in turn would compromise the security
+mechanism whereby the child interpreter could execute arbitrary
+code in the parent.  This in turn would compromise the security
 of the system.
 .SH "HIDDEN COMMANDS"
 .PP
@@ -730,28 +726,28 @@ invoke\fR. Hidden commands and exposed commands reside in separate name
 spaces. It is possible to define a hidden command and an exposed command by
 the same name within one interpreter.
 .PP
-Hidden commands in a slave interpreter can be invoked in the body of
-procedures called in the master during alias invocation. For example, an
-alias for \fBsource\fR could be created in a slave interpreter. When it is
-invoked in the slave interpreter, a procedure is called in the master
+Hidden commands in a child interpreter can be invoked in the body of
+procedures called in the parent during alias invocation. For example, an
+alias for \fBsource\fR could be created in a child interpreter. When it is
+invoked in the child interpreter, a procedure is called in the parent
 interpreter to check that the operation is allowable (e.g. it asks to
-source a file that the slave interpreter is allowed to access). The
-procedure then it invokes the hidden \fBsource\fR command in the slave
+source a file that the child interpreter is allowed to access). The
+procedure then it invokes the hidden \fBsource\fR command in the child
 interpreter to actually source in the contents of the file. Note that two
-commands named \fBsource\fR exist in the slave interpreter: the alias, and
+commands named \fBsource\fR exist in the child interpreter: the alias, and
 the hidden command.
 .PP
-Because a master interpreter may invoke a hidden command as part of
+Because a parent interpreter may invoke a hidden command as part of
 handling an alias invocation, great care must be taken to avoid evaluating
 any arguments passed in through the alias invocation.
-Otherwise, malicious slave interpreters could cause a trusted master
+Otherwise, malicious child interpreters could cause a trusted parent
 interpreter to execute dangerous commands on their behalf. See the section
 on \fBALIAS INVOCATION\fR for a more complete discussion of this topic.
 To help avoid this problem, no substitutions or evaluations are
 applied to arguments of \fBinterp invokehidden\fR.
 .PP
 Safe interpreters are not allowed to invoke hidden commands in themselves
-or in their descendants. This prevents safe slaves from gaining access to
+or in their descendants. This prevents them from gaining access to
 hidden functionality in themselves or their descendants.
 .PP
 The set of hidden commands in an interpreter can be manipulated by a trusted
@@ -770,12 +766,12 @@ qualifiers, and you must first rename a command in a namespace to the
 global namespace before you can hide it.
 Commands to be hidden by \fBinterp hide\fR are looked up in the global
 namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
-prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
+prevents children from fooling a parent interpreter into hiding the wrong
 command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
 .SH "RESOURCE LIMITS"
 .PP
 Every interpreter has two kinds of resource limits that may be imposed by any
-master interpreter upon its slaves. Command limits (of type \fBcommand\fR)
+parent interpreter upon its children. Command limits (of type \fBcommand\fR)
 restrict the total number of Tcl commands that may be executed by an
 interpreter (as can be inspected via the \fBinfo cmdcount\fR command), and
 time limits (of type \fBtime\fR) place a limit by which execution within the
@@ -784,7 +780,7 @@ interpreter must complete. Note that time limits are expressed as
 \fBafter\fR) because they may be modified after creation.
 .PP
 When a limit is exceeded for an interpreter, first any handler callbacks
-defined by master interpreters are called. If those callbacks increase or
+defined by parent interpreters are called. If those callbacks increase or
 remove the limit, execution within the (previously) limited interpreter
 continues. If the limit is still in force, an error is generated at that point
 and normal processing of errors within the interpreter (by the \fBcatch\fR
@@ -841,13 +837,13 @@ This option specifies the number of commands that the interpreter may execute
 before triggering the command limit. This option may be the empty string,
 which indicates that a command limit is not set for the interpreter.
 .PP
-Where an interpreter with a resource limit set on it creates a slave
-interpreter, that slave interpreter will have resource limits imposed on it
-that are at least as restrictive as the limits on the creating master
-interpreter. If the master interpreter of the limited master wishes to relax
+Where an interpreter with a resource limit set on it creates a child
+interpreter, that child interpreter will have resource limits imposed on it
+that are at least as restrictive as the limits on the creating parent
+interpreter. If the parent interpreter of the limited parent wishes to relax
 these conditions, it should hide the \fBinterp\fR command in the child and
 then use aliases and the \fBinterp invokehidden\fR subcommand to provide such
-access as it chooses to the \fBinterp\fR command to the limited master as
+access as it chooses to the \fBinterp\fR command to the limited parent as
 necessary.
 .SH "BACKGROUND EXCEPTION HANDLING"
 .PP
@@ -908,9 +904,9 @@ set i [\fBinterp create\fR]
 }
 .CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-bgerror(n), load(n), safe(n), Tcl_CreateSlave(3), Tcl_Eval(3), Tcl_BackgroundException(3)
+bgerror(n), load(n), safe(n), Tcl_CreateChild(3), Tcl_Eval(3), Tcl_BackgroundException(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
-alias, master interpreter, safe interpreter, slave interpreter
+alias, parent interpreter, safe interpreter, child interpreter
 '\"Local Variables:
 '\"mode: nroff
 '\"End:
@@ -42,3 +42,7 @@ set data {1 {2 3} 4 {5 {6 7} 8}}
 list(n), lappend(n), split(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, join, list, separator
+'\" Local Variables:
+'\" mode: nroff
+'\" fill-column: 78
+'\" End:
@@ -22,6 +22,12 @@ and appends each of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to that list as a separate
 element, with spaces between elements.
 If \fIvarName\fR does not exist, it is created as a list with elements
 given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.
+.VS TIP508
+If \fIvarName\fR indicate an element that does not exist of an array that has
+a default value set, list that is comprised of the default value with all the
+\fIvalue\fR arguments appended as elements will be stored in the array
+element.
+.VE TIP508
 \fBLappend\fR is similar to \fBappend\fR except that the \fIvalue\fRs
 are appended as list elements rather than raw text.
 This command provides a relatively efficient way to build up
@@ -43,7 +49,12 @@ Using \fBlappend\fR to build up a list of numbers.
 1 2 3 4 5
 .CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n),
-lsort(n), lrange(n)
+list(n), lassign(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n),
+lmap(n), lpop(n), lrange(n), lremove(n), lrepeat(n), lreplace(n),
+lreverse(n), lsearch(n), lset(n), lsort(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 append, element, list, variable
+.\" Local variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" fill-column: 78
+.\" End:
@@ -52,7 +52,9 @@ command in many shell languages like this:
 set ::argv [\fBlassign\fR $::argv argumentToReadOff]
 .CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-lindex(n), list(n), lrange(n), lset(n), set(n)
+list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n),
+lmap(n), lpop(n), lrange(n), lremove(n), lrepeat(n), lreplace(n),
+lreverse(n), lsearch(n), lset(n), lsort(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 assign, element, list, multiple, set, variable
 '\"Local Variables:
@@ -124,7 +124,7 @@ will read all the \fB.tcl\fR files in subdirectory \fBfoo\fR and
 generate a new index file \fBfoo/tclIndex\fR.
 .PP
 \fBAuto_mkindex\fR parses the Tcl scripts by sourcing them into a
-slave interpreter and monitoring the proc and namespace commands that
+child interpreter and monitoring the proc and namespace commands that
 are executed.  Extensions can use the (undocumented)
 auto_mkindex_parser package to register other commands that can
 contribute to the auto_load index. You will have to read through
@@ -299,18 +299,13 @@ These variables are only used in the \fBtcl_endOfWord\fR,
 This variable contains a regular expression that is used by routines
 like \fBtcl_endOfWord\fR to identify whether a character is part of a
 word or not.  If the pattern matches a character, the character is
-considered to be a non-word character.  On Windows platforms, spaces,
-tabs, and newlines are considered non-word characters.  Under Unix,
-everything but numbers, letters and underscores are considered
-non-word characters.
+considered to be a non-word character. The default is "\\W".
 .TP
 \fBtcl_wordchars\fR
 This variable contains a regular expression that is used by routines
 like \fBtcl_endOfWord\fR to identify whether a character is part of a
 word or not.  If the pattern matches a character, the character is
-considered to be a word character.  On Windows platforms, words are
-comprised of any character that is not a space, tab, or newline.  Under
-Unix, words are comprised of numbers, letters or underscores.
+considered to be a word character. The default is "\\w".
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 env(n), info(n), re_syntax(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
--- a/Show More
+++ b/Show More